i
22
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
PETROL - DIESEL MANUAL OR 6-SPEED ELECTRONIC GEAR
CONTROL OR AUTOMATIC GEARBOX INSTRUMENT PANELS
Panel grouping together the vehicle
operation indication dials and warning
lamps.
5. Screen .
6. Display management button.
Recalls the service information.
Resets the selected function to
zero (trip distance recorder or
service indicator).
7. Instrument panel lighting button.
Adjusts the brightness of the
lighting of the instruments and
controls.
Dials
1. Rev counter.
Indicates the speed of rotation of
the engine (x 1 000 rpm).
2. Coolant temperature.
Indicates the temperature of the
engine coolant (° Celsius).
3. Fuel level.
Indicates the quantity of fuel
remaining in the tank.
4. Vehicle speed.
Indicates the current speed of the
moving vehicle (mph or km/h).
A. Speed limiter
(mph or km/h) or
Cruise control.
B. Gear change indicator.
C. 6-speed electronic gear control
or automatic gearbox.
D. Trip distance recorder.
(miles or km)
E. Service indicator
(miles or km) then,
engine oil level indicator
then
distance recorder.
(miles or km)
These three functions are displayed
in succession when the ignition is
switched on.
Display
For further information, refer to the
paragraph relating to the button or
function and its associated display.
i
23
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
PETROL - DIESEL MANUAL OR 6-SPEED ELECTRONIC GEAR
CONTROL OR AUTOMATIC GEARBOX INSTRUMENT PANELS
Panel grouping together the vehicle
operation indication dials and warning
lamps.
5. Small screen .
6. Large central screen .
7. Display management button.
Starts a manual CHECK and
recalls the service information.
Resets the function selected to
zero (trip distance recorder or
service indicator).
8. Instrument panel lighting button.
Adjusts the brightness of the
lighting of the instruments and
controls.
Dials
1. Rev counter.
Indicates the speed of rotation of
the engine (x 1 000 rpm).
2. Coolant temperature.
Indicates the temperature of the
engine coolant (° Celsius).
3. Fuel level.
Indicates the quantity of fuel
remaining in the tank.
4. Vehicle speed.
Indicates the current speed of the
moving vehicle (mph or km/h).
A. Trip distance recorder.
(miles or km)
B. Distance recorder.
(miles or km)
C. Engine oil level indicator,
service indicator.
(miles or km)
These two functions are displayed
when the ignition is switched on,
then disappear after a few seconds.
Displays
For further information, refer to the
paragraph which relates to the but-
ton or function and its associated
display.
The following functions are displayed
depending on the selection.
- Warning lamps /CHECK.
- Tyre under-infl ation detection.
- Speed limiter/Cruise control.
- Gear change indicator.
- 6-speed electronic gear control
or automatic gearbox.
- Navigation - Guidance/Trip
computer.
i
24
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
PETROL - DIESEL MANUAL OR 6-SPEED ELECTRONIC GEAR CONTROL
OR AUTOMATIC GEARBOX PC COM 3D INSTRUMENT PANELS
Dials
1. Rev counter.
Indicates the speed of rotation of
the engine (x 1 000 rpm).
2. Coolant temperature.
Indicates the temperature of the
engine coolant (° Celsius).
3. Fuel level.
Indicates the quantity of fuel
remaining in the tank.
4. Vehicle speed.
Indicates the current speed of the
moving vehicle (km/h or mph).
A. Trip distance recorder.
(miles or km)
B. Distance recorder.
(miles or km).
C. Engine oil level indicator,
service indicator.
(miles or km)
These two functions are displayed
when the ignition is switched on,
then disappear after a few seconds.
The following functions are displayed
depending on the selection.
- Warning lamps /CHECK.
- Tyre under-infl ation detection.
- Speed limiter/Cruise control.
- Gear change indicator.
- 6-speed electronic gear control
or automatic gearbox.
- Navigation - Guidance/Trip
computer.
- Vehicle parameters.
Panel grouping together the vehicle
operation indication dials and warning
lamps.
Displays
5. Small screen .
6. PC Com 3D 16/9 large central
screen .
7. Display management button.
Starts a manual CHECK and
recalls the service information.
Resets the function selected to
zero (trip distance recorder or
service indicator).
8. Instrument panel lighting button.
Adjusts the brightness of the lighting
of the instruments and controls.
For further information, refer to the
paragraph which relates to the but-
ton or function and its associated
display.
i
25
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
* According to country.
Instrument panel navigator
associated with the PC Com 3D
Controls
There are four buttons to control the in-
strument panel 16/9 large screen:
1. access the main menu, confi rm the
selection,
2. move up through the menu,
3. move down through the menu,
4. return to the previous screen, exit
from the menu.
Main menu
Press button 1 for access to the
main menu and select one of the
following functions:
- "Vehicle parameters",
- "Choice of language",
- "Choice of units".
Press button 2 or 3 to move on the
screen.
Press button 1 again to confi rm the
selection.
The main menu and its associated
functions can only be accessed
when stationary, via buttons 1 to 4 .
A message appears on the screen
above a certain speed threshold,
indicating that the general menu
cannot be displayed.
The trip computer displays can
only be accessed while driving, via
buttons 2 and 3 (refer to the "Trip
computer" section).
This group of buttons permits:
- when stationary , confi guration
of the vehicle's equipment and
of the parameters of the display
(languages, units...),
- while driving , scrolling of the
active functions (trip computer,
navigation...).
Vehicle parameters
This menu allows you to activate or deacti-
vate certain driving and comfort equipment:
- wiper linked with reverse gear
(refer to the "Visibility" section),
- guide-me-home and welcome
lighting (refer to the "Visibility"
section),
- interior mood lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- daytime running lamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- rear parking sensors (refer to the
"Driving" section).
Choice of language
This menu allows you to select the lan-
guage used by the display: Deutsch,
English, Espanol, Français, Italiano,
Nederlands, Portugues, Türkçe * .
Choice of units
This menu allows you to select the units:
temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit)
and consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/
l).
!
26
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
The warning lamps may come on
continuously or fl ash.
Certain warning lamps may come
on in two different modes. Only by
relating the type of lighting to the
operating status of the vehicle can
it be ascertained whether the situ-
ation is normal or whether a fault
has occurred.
Indicator and warning lamps
Visual indicators informing the driver
that a system is in operation (operation
or deactivation indicator lamps) or of the
occurrence of a fault (warning lamp).
Associated warnings
The switching on of certain warning lamps
may be accompanied by an audible signal
and a message on the multifunction screen.
Operation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes
on, this confi rms that the corresponding
system has come into operation.
Left-hand direction indicator.
Parking brake applied.
Right-hand direction
indicator.
Main beam headlamps.
Dipped beam headlamps.
Diesel engine pre-heating
Wait until this has gone out be-
fore operating the starter.
Front foglamps.
When the ignition is switched on
The warning lamps come on for a few
seconds when the vehicle's ignition is
switched on.
When the engine is started, these warning
lamps should switch off.
If they remain on, before moving off,
consult the warning lamp concerned.
Common operation indicator lamps
Rear foglamp.
27
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Foot on brake.
Press the brake pedal to start
the engine with the 6-speed
electronic gear control gearbox
or automatic gearbox.
Specifi c operation indicator lamps The other indicator lamps appear on
the large screen, located in the centre
of the instrument panel.
Automatic locking.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that you have activated auto-
matic locking of the doors and
boot while driving.
Speed limiter.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that you have activated the
speed limiter mode.
If this is displayed, it indi-
cates that you can set the
speed limiter speed value to
be stored.
Cruise control.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that you have activated the
cruise control mode.
If this is displayed it indi-
cates that you can set the
cruise control speed value
to be stored.
Automatic gearbox.
This display indicates the
position that you have selected
on the gear selection gate
(R, N, A or M).
Automatic rain sensitive wipers.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that you have activated auto-
matic rain sensitive windscreen
wipers.
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
If this is displayed, it indicates that
you have activated automatic illu-
mination of headlamps.
This display indicates the gear
engaged in automatic or manual
operating mode (1 to 6).
This display indicates the ope-
rating mode selected (auto-
matic or sport).
This display indicates the gear
engaged in the automatic or
manual operation programme.
This display indicates the ope-
rating programme selected
(automatic, sport, snow or
manual).
6-speed electronic gear control gearbox.
This display indicates the posi-
tion that you have selected on
the gear selection gate (P, R, N
or D).
28
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Deactivation warning lamps
If one of the following warning lamps
comes on, this confi rms that the corre-
sponding system has been switched off
intentionally.
Passenger's airbag system
deactivation.
The passenger's airbag system
is put into service automatically
when the vehicle is started.
A specifi c control switch, located on the
passenger's side of the dashboard, per-
mits deactivation of the system. This is
confi rmed by continuous lighting of this
warning lamp on the instrument panel
or on the seat belt and passenger's
front airbag warning lamps display.
Dynamic stability control
(ESP/ASR) deactivation
The ESP/ASR system is put
into service automatically when
the vehicle is started.
A specifi c button, located on the dash-
board, permits deactivation of the sys-
tem. This is confi rmed by continuous
lighting of this warning lamp and of the
indicator lamp on the button.
From approximately 30 mph (50 km/h),
the system is reactivated automatically.
Common deactivation warning
lamps
Specifi c deactivation warning lamps
Automatic locking.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that you have deactivated the
automatic locking of the doors
and boot while driving.
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers.
If this is displayed, it indicates that
you have deactivated automatic
rain sensitive windscreen wipers.
The other warning lamps appear on the
large screen, located in the centre of
the instrument panel.
Speed limiter.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that you have deactivated the
speed limiter.
Cruise control.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that you have deactivated the
cruise control.
Automatic illumination of
headlamps.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that you have deactivated auto-
matic illumination of headlamps.
!
29
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
When the engine is running or the ve-
hicle is moving, the lighting of one of the
following warning lamps indicates the
occurrence of a fault requiring interven-
tion on the part of the driver.
Central alert.
Lighting is associated with
the displaying of another
warning lamp:
- punctured wheel,
- braking,
- power steering,
- engine oil pressure,
- coolant temperature,
stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
Service.
If this comes on, it indicates the
occurrence of a problem in one
of the systems which does not
have a specifi c warning light.
To identify the problem, consult the
message on the multifunction screen.
Braking.
If this comes on, it indicates the
occurrence of a fault in one of
the braking systems:
- signifi cant drop in the brake fl uid
level,
- electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) faulty (simultaneous
lighting of the ABS warning lamp),
stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
When the vehicle is moving, check that
the parking brake is fully released.
Any fault resulting in the displaying
of a warning lamp must be investi-
gated further by reading the associ-
ated message on the multifunction
screen.
In the event of diffi culty, do not
hesitate to contact a PEUGEOT
dealer.
Warning lamps
Common warning lamps
After checking:
- that the doors, boot, the rear
screen and bonnet are closed,
- the engine oil level,
- the screenwash fl uid level,
- the remote control battery,
- the pressure of the tyres,
- the end of saturation of the particle
emission fi lter (Diesel),
for any other situations, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer.
Anti-lock braking system
(ABS).
If this comes on, it indicates the
occurrence of a fault in the anti-
lock braking system.
However, this does not prevent operation
of the vehicle's servo-assisted braking.
!
30
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Engine autodiagnostics
system.
If this comes on, it indicates the
occurrence of a fault in the en-
gine management system.
If it fl ashes, it indicates the occurrence of
a fault in the emission control system.
Low fuel level.
When this fi rst comes on, you
have approximately 6 litres of
fuel left in the tank.
It is imperative that you refuel to avoid
running out of fuel.
This warning lamp comes on again
each time the ignition is switched on,
until suffi cient fuel has been added.
Capacity of the tank: approximately
60 litres .
Maximum coolant
temperature.
If this comes on, it indicates that
the temperature in the cooling
system is too high. Stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
Airbags.
If this comes on, it indicates the
occurrence of a fault in one of
the airbag or seat belt preten-
sioner systems.
Seat belt not fastened/
unfastened.
If this comes on, it indicates
that the driver and/or the front
passenger has not fastened or has un-
fastened their seat belt. According to
version and/or country, the unfastening
of the seat belt only may be detected for
the front passenger.
It also indicates that one or more rear
passengers have unfastened their seat
belt (on the 2nd row rear seats only on
the SW with panoramic sunroof).
Water in diesel * .
If this comes on, it indicates the
presence of water in the diesel
fi lter.
There is a risk of damage to the injection
system on Diesel engines.
Door open.
A door, the boot or the rear
screen is open:
Battery charge.
If this comes on, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the
battery charging circuit (dirty or
loose terminals, slack or cut alternator
belt...).
Engine oil pressure.
If this comes on, it indicates the
occurrence of a fault in the en-
gine lubrication circuit. Stop the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Specifi c warning lamps
* According to country.
Dynamic stability control
(ESP/ASR).
The ESP/ASR system is put
into service automatically when
the vehicle is started.
Unless the system has been deactivat-
ed, if this warning lamp and the indicator
lamp on the button come on continuous
ly,
this indicates the occurrence of a fault in
the ESP/ASR system or in the hill start
assist system.
-
if the speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h), this
warning lamp comes on continuously.
- if the speed is higher than 6 mph (10 km/h),
this warning lamp comes on continuously,
accompanied by an audible signal.
Never continue to drive until you
run out of fuel, this could damage
the emission control and injection
systems.
i
!
31
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
The displaying of certain warning
lamps may be accompanied by an
audible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen.
Specifi c warning lamps
The other warning lamps appear on the
large screen, located in the centre of
the instrument panel.
Depending on the seriousness of the
fault, they may be displayed in orange
or red.
Certain warning lamps may be
linked with those of the instrument
panel.
If they are linked with the STOP
warning lamp, stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
Directional headlamps.
If this fl ashes, it indicates the
occurrence of a fault in the
directional headlamps system.
Engine oil pressure.
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the
engine lubrication circuit. Stop
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Service.
If this is displayed, it indicates the occur-
rence of a fault in one of the following:
Engine autodiagnostics
system.
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the
engine management system.
Engine oil level.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that the engine oil level is too
low. Stop the vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so.
Coolant temperature.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that the temperature in the cool-
ing system is too high. Stop the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Coolant level.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that the coolant level is too low.
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
Battery charge.
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the
battery charging circuit (dirty or
loose terminals, slack or cut alternator
belt...).
- the engine management system,
- the emissions control system.
!
32
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Airbags.
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in one
of the airbag or pretensioning
seat belt systems.
Braking.
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in one
of the braking systems:
- signifi cant drop in the brake fl uid
level,
- electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) faulty (simultaneous
lighting of the ABS warning lamp).
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
If the vehicle is moving, check that the
parking brake is fully released.
Anti-lock braking system
(ABS).
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the
anti-lock braking system.
However, this does not prevent op-
eration of the vehicle's servo-assisted
braking.
Dynamic stability control
(ESP/ASR).
The ESP/ASR system is put
into service automatically when
the vehicle is started.
Unless the system has been deactivated,
if this warning lamp and the indicator lamp
on the button come on, this indicates the
occurrence of a fault in the ESP/ASR sys-
tem or in the hill start assist.
Power steering.
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the
power steering. Stop the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so.
Door open.
A door, the boot or the rear
screen is open:
Ice warning.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that there is risk of the forma-
tion of ice on the road below a
temperature of 3 °C.
Drive carefully.
Parking brake.
If this is displayed, while the ve-
hicle is moving, it indicates that
the parking brake has not been
fully released.
Electronic immobiliser.
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the
electronic engine immobiliser
system or that the remote control bat-
tery is fl at.
Fuel level.
When this fi rst comes on, you
have approximately 6 litres of
fuel remaining in the tank.
Fill up as soon as possible to avoid run-
ning out of fuel.
This warning lamp reappears each time
the ignition is switched on until suffi cient
fuel has been added.
Capacity of the tank: approximately
60 litres .
Screenwash fl uid level.
If this is displayed, following an
action on the wiper stalk, it indi-
cates that the screenwash fl uid
level is low.
Fill the screenwash/headlamp wash fl uid
reservoir when you next stop.
-
if the speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h),
this warning lamp is displayed in orange,
-
if the speed is higher than 6 mph (10 km/h),
this warning lamp is displayed in red.
Never continue to drive until you
run out of fuel, this could damage
the emissions control and injection
systems.
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Water in diesel * .
If this is displayed, it indicates
the presence of water in the
diesel fi lter.
There is a risk of damage to the injec-
tion system on Diesel engines.
Automatic headlamp
adjustment.
If this is displayed, it indicates the
occurrence of a fault in the auto-
matic headlamp adjustment.
Particle emission fi lter
(Diesel).
If this is displayed, linked with
the service warning lamp, it indi-
cates the start of saturation of the parti-
cle emission fi lter or a low diesel additive
reservoir level.
As soon as traffi c conditions permit, re-
generate the fi lter by driving at a speed
of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the
service warning lamp is switched off.
If the service warning lamp is still dis-
played, the additive level is low. Have it
topped up by a PEUGEOT dealer without
delay.
Defl ated tyre.
If this is displayed, it indicates
low pressure in one or more
wheels.
Check the tyre pressures as soon as
possible.
Punctured tyre.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that one or more wheels are
punctured. Stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
Change the damaged wheel and have it
repaired by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Tyre under-infl ation
detection.
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault on one
of the sensors or in the tyre under-infl a-
tion detection system.
It may also indicate the absence of a
sensor when the spare wheel, which
does not have a sensor, is fi tted in place
of a punctured wheel.
Automatic lighting.
If this comes on, it indicates the
occurrence of a fault in the auto-
matic lighting.
Use the other positions of the lighting
stalk to control the lighting manually.
Visual and/or audible
parking sensors.
If this comes on, in forward and/
or reverse gear, it indicates a
fault in the parking sensor system.
6-speed electronic gear control
gearbox or automatic gearbox.
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the
6-speed electronic gear control gear-
box or automatic gearbox. The gearbox
will then operate in down-grade mode,
locked on 3rd gear.
It may also be displayed if a door is
opened.
Invalid value.
If this is displayed, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the
programme of the 6-speed
electronic gear control gear-
box or automatic gearbox.
Position P or N.
If this is displayed, it indicates
that the gear lever must be
placed in position P or N in
order to start the engine.
* According to country.
34
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Coolant temperature indicator
With the engine running, when the nee-
dle is:
- in zone A , the temperature is
correct,
- in zone B , the temperature is
too high; the max temperature
warning lamp 1 and the central
STOP warning lamp come on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message on the multifunction
screen.
You MUST stop as soon as it is safe
to do so.
Wait a few minutes before switching off
the engine.
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
After driving for a few minutes, the tem-
perature and pressure in the cooling
system increase.
To top up the level:
wait for the engine to cool,
unscrew the cap by two turns to
allow the pressure to drop,
when the pressure has dropped,
remove the cap,
top up the level to the "MAX" mark.
i
35
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
The level read will only be correct if
the vehicle is on level ground and
the engine has been off for more
than 15 minutes.
Engine oil level indicator
System which informs the driver whether
the engine oil level is correct or not.
This information is indicated for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
on, after the service information.
Oil level correct
Lack of oil
Oil level indicator fault
Dipstick
This is indicated by the fl ashing of "OIL" ,
linked with the service warning lamp, ac-
companied by an audible signal and a
message on the multifunction screen.
If the lack of oil is confi rmed by a check
using the dipstick, it is essential that the
level is topped up to prevent damage to
the engine.
This is indicated by the fl ashing of "OIL--" .
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
Refer to the "Checks" section to locate
the dipstick and the oil fi ller cap on your
engine.
There are 2 marks on the
dipstick:
- A = max; never exceed
this level (risk of
damage to the engine),
- B = min; top up the level
via the oil fi ller cap,
using the grade of oil
suited to your engine.
36
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Service indicator
System which informs the driver when
the next service is due, in accordance
with the manufacturer's servicing
schedule.
The point at which the service is due is
calculated from the last indicator zero
reset. It is determined by two param
e-
ters:
- the distance travelled,
- the time elapsed since the last
service.
Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and
1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before
the next service is due
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the spanner symbolising the service
operations comes on. The distance re-
corder display line indicates the distance
remaining before the next service is due.
Example: 2 800 km remain before the
next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the display indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the spanner is switched off ; the
distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The display then indicates
the total and trip distances.
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
Example: 900 km remain before the
next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the display indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the distance recorder resumes its
normal operation. The spanner re-
mains on to indicate that a service
must be carried out soon.
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
When the ignition is switched on, no
service information appears on the dis-
play.
i
i
37
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Service indicator zero reset
After each service, the service indicator
must be reset to zero.
The procedure for resetting to zero is as
follows :
switch off the ignition,
press and hold the trip distance
recorder zero reset button,
switch on the ignition; the
distance recorder display begins a
countdown,
when the display indicates
"=0"
,
release the button; the spanner
disappears.
The distance remaining may be
weighted by the time factor, depend-
ing on the driver's driving habits.
Therefore, the spanner may also
come on if you have exceeded the
two year service interval.
Service overdue
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the spanner fl ashes to
indicate that the service must be carried
out as soon as possible.
Example: the service is overdue by
300 miles (km).
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the display indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the distance recorder resumes its
normal operation. The spanner re-
mains lit .
Retrieving the service information
You can access the service information
at any time.
Press the trip distance recorder
zero reset button.
The service information is displayed for
a few seconds, then disappears.
38
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Total distance recorder
System which measures the total distance
travelled by the vehicle during its life.
The total and trip distances are dis-
played for thirty seconds when the igni-
tion is switched off, when the driver's
door is opened and when the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
Trip distance recorder
System which measures a distance
travelled since it was reset to zero by
the driver.
With the ignition on, press the button
until zeros appear.
Manual Check
This function allows you to check the
status of the vehicle (reminder of the
warnings and of the "activated" or "de-
activated" status of the confi gurable
functions) and the service information.
With the engine running, to start
a manual check, briefl y press
the "CHECK/000" button on the
instrument panel.
If no faults have been detected,
"CHECK OK" appears on the large
central instrument panel screen.
If a "major" fault has been detected,
only the warning lamps concerned ap-
pear on the large central instrument
panel screen. Have it checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
If a "minor" fault has been detected, the
warning lamp concerned then "CHECK
OK" appear on the large central instru-
ment panel screen. Consult a PEUGEOT
dealer.
39
INSTRUMENTS and CONTROLS
Lighting rheostat
Permits manual adjustment of the brightness
of the instruments and controls in relation to
the exterior brightness. Only operates when
the vehicle lighting is on, with the exception
of the daytime running lamps.
Activation
Press the button to change the brightness
of the instruments and controls.
When the lighting reaches the minimum
setting, release the button, then press
again to increase it.
or
When the lighting reaches the maximum
setting, release the button, then press
again to reduce it.
When the lighting reaches the level of
brightness required, release the button.
Deactivation
When the vehicle lighting is off, or in
day mode on vehicles fi tted with day-
time running lamps, pressing the button
does not have any effect.
40
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
Displays on the screen
This displays the following information:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature * (this fl ashes if
there is a risk of ice),
- status of the openings (doors,
boot...),
- trip computer (refer to the end of the
section).
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission
control system faulty") or information
messages (e.g.: "Boot open") may ap-
pear temporarily. These can be cleared
by pressing the "ESC" button.
MONOCHROME SCREEN A
(WITHOUT PC SOUND)
Controls General menu
There are three display control buttons:
- "ESC" to abandon the operation in
progress,
- "MENU" to scroll through the menus
or sub-menus,
- "OK" to select the menu or sub-
menu required.
Press the "MENU" button to scroll
through the various menus of the
main menu :
- vehicle confi guration,
- options,
- display settings,
- languages,
- units.
Press the "OK" button to select the
menu required.
* With air conditioning only.
!
41
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
Vehicle confi guration
Options
Once the "Options" menu has been se-
lected, you can start diagnostics of the
status of the equipment (active, not ac-
tive, faulty).
Languages
Once the "Languages" menu has been
selected, you can change the language
used by the display (Français, Italiano,
Nederlands, Portugues, Portugues-
Brasil, Deutsch, English, Espanol).
Display settings
Once the "Display settings" menu has
been selected, you can gain access to
the following settings:
- year,
- month,
- day,
- hour,
- minutes,
- 12 or 24 hour mode.
Units
Once the "Units" menu has been se-
lected, you can change the units of the
following parameters:
- temperature (°C or °F),
- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or
km/l).
Once you have selected a setting,
press the "OK" button to change its
value.
Wait for approximately ten seconds
without any action to allow the
changed data to be recorded or
press the "ESC" button to cancel.
The screen then returns to the normal
display.
Once the "Vehicle confi guration" menu
has been selected, you can activate or
deactivate the following equipment:
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer
to the "Visibility" section),
- "guide-me-home" and welcome
lighting (refer to the "Visibility"
section),
- daytime running lamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- rear parking sensors (refer to the
"Driving" section).
For safety reasons, confi guration
of the multifunction screen by the
driver must only be done when sta-
tionary.
42
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
MONOCHROME SCREEN A
Controls
Displays on the screen
This displays the following information:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature * (this fl ashes if
there is a risk of ice),
- status of the openings (doors,
boot...),
- audio sources (radio, CD...),
- trip computer (refer to the end of the
section).
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission
control system faulty") or information
messages (e.g.: "Boot open") may ap-
pear temporarily. These can be cleared
by pressing the "ESC" button.
Main menu
Press the "MENU" button for access
to the main menu , then press the
" " or " " buttons to scroll through
the various menus:
- radio-CD,
- vehicle confi guration,
- options,
- display settings,
- languages,
- units.
Press the "OK" button to select the
menu required.
From the control panel of your PC Sound,
you can:
press the "MENU" button for access
to the main menu ,
press the " " or " " buttons to scroll
through the items on the screen,
press the "MODE" button to change
the permanent application (trip
computer, audio source...),
press the " " or " " buttons to
change a setting value,
press the "OK" button to confi rm,
or
press the "ESC" button to abandon
the operation in progress.
Radio-CD
With the PC Sound switched on, once
the "Radio-CD" menu has been select-
ed you can activate or deactivate the
functions linked with use of the radio
(RDS, REG), the CD or the CD changer
(introscan, shuffl e, CD repeat).
For more information on the "Radio-CD"
application, refer to the PC Sound part
of the "Audio and Telematics" section.
* With air conditioning only.
!
43
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
For safety reasons, confi guration
of the multifunction screen by the
driver must only be done when sta-
tionary.
Display settings
Once the "Display settings" menu has
been selected, you can gain access to
the following settings:
- year,
- month,
- day,
- hour,
- minutes,
- 12 or 24 hour mode.
Languages
Once the "Languages" menu has been
selected, you can change the language
used by the display (Français, Italiano,
Nederlands, Portugues, Portugues-Brasil,
Deutsch, English, Espanol).
Units
Once the "Units" menu has been se-
lected, you can change the units of the
following parameters:
- temperature (°C or °F),
- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or
km/l).
Once you have selected a setting,
press the " " or " " buttons to
change its value.
Press the " " or " " buttons to
switch respectively to the previous
or next setting.
Press the "OK" button to record
the change and return to the normal
display or press the "ESC" button to
cancel.
Vehicle confi guration
Options
Once the "Options" menu has been se-
lected, you can start diagnostics of the
status of the equipment (active, not ac-
tive, faulty).
Once the "Vehicle Confi guration" menu
has been selected, you can activate or
deactivate the following equipment:
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer
to the "Visibility" section),
- "guide-me-home" and welcome
lighting (refer to the "Visibility"
section),
- daytime running lamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- rear parking sensors (refer to the
"Driving" section).
44
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
MONOCHROME SCREEN C
Main menu
Displays on the screen
This displays the following information:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature * (this fl ashes if
there is a risk of ice),
- status of the openings (doors,
boot...),
- audio sources (radio, CD...),
- trip computer (refer to the end of the
section).
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission
control system faulty") or information
messages (e.g.: "Automatic switching
on of the headlamps activated") may ap-
pear temporarily. These can be cleared
by pressing the "ESC" button.
"Audio functions" menu
Controls
From the control panel of your PC Sound,
you can:
press the "MENU" button for access
to the main menu ,
press the " " or " " buttons to scroll
through the items on the screen,
press the "MODE" button to change
the permanent application (trip
computer, audio source...),
press the " " or " " buttons to
change a setting value,
press the "OK" button to confi rm,
or
press the "ESC" button to abandon
the operation in progress.
Press the "MENU" button for access
to the main menu :
- audio functions,
- diagnosis vehicle,
- personalisation-confi guration,
- telephone (Bleutooth system).
Press the " " or " " buttons to select
the menu required, then confi rm by
pressing the "OK" button.
* With air conditioning only.
With the PC Sound switched on, once
this menu has been selected you can
activate or deactivate the functions
linked with use of the radio (RDS, REG,
RadioText), the CD or the CD changer
(introscan, shuffl e, CD repeat).
For more information on the "Audio
functions" application, refer to the PC
Sound part of the "Audio and Telemat-
ics" section.
45
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
"Diagnosis vehicle"
menu
Press the "MENU" button for access
to the main menu.
Press the arrows, then the "OK"
button to select the " Diagnosis
vehicle " menu.
On the " Diagnosis vehicle " menu,
select the following application:
Alert log
This summarises the active warning
messages, displaying them in succes-
sion on the multifunction screen.
Once this menu has been selected, you
can consult information concerning the
status of the vehicle, such as the alert
log.
Defi ne the vehicle parameters
Once this menu has been selected, you
can activate or deactivate the following
equipment:
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer
to the "Visibility" section),
- "guide-me-home" and welcome
lighting (refer to the "Visibility"
section),
- interior mood lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- daytime running lamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- rear parking sensors (refer to the
"Driving" section).
"Personalisation-
Configuration" menu
Once this menu has been selected, you
can gain access to the following func-
tions:
- defi ne the vehicle parameters,
- display confi guration,
- choice of language.
!
46
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
For safety reasons, confi guration
of the multifunction screen by the
driver must only be done when sta-
tionary.
"Telephone" menu
Display confi guration
Once this menu has been selected, you
can gain access to the following set-
tings:
- brightness-video setting,
- date and time setting,
- choice of units.
Choice of language
Once this menu has been selected,
you can change the language used
by the display (Deutsch, English,
Espanol, Français, Italiano, Nederlands,
Portugues, Portugues-Brasil, Türkçe ** ).
Example: setting of the duration of the
"guideme-home" lighting
Press the " " or " " buttons, then
the "OK" button to select the menu
required.
Press the " " or " " buttons,
then the "OK" button to select the
"Guide-me-home headlamps" line.
Press the " " or " " buttons to
set the value required (15, 30 or
60 seconds), then press the "OK"
button to confi rm.
Press the " " or " " buttons, then
the "OK" button to select the "OK"
box and confi rm or press the "ESC"
button to cancel.
With the PC Sound switched on, once
this menu has been selected you can
confi gure your Bluetooth system (pair-
ing), consult the various telephone di-
rectories (calls log, services...) and
manage your communications (pick up,
hang up, call waiting, secret mode...).
For more information on the "Telephone"
application, refer to the PC Sound part
of the "Audio and Telematics" section.
** According to country.
i
47
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
For operation of the retractable dis-
play (opening, closing, adjustment
of the position, etc.), refer to the
paragraph "Access to the retract-
able display".
Displays on the screen
Once the screen is unfolded, it displays
the following information automatically
and directly:
- time,
- date,
- altitude,
- ambient temperature (the value
displayed fl ashes if there is a risk of
ice),
- openings check,
- warning and vehicle function status
messages, displayed temporarily,
- audio functions,
- trip computer information,
- satellite navigation system information.
From the PC Nav control panel, to se-
lect one of the applications:
press the dedicated "RADIO" ,
"MUSIC" , "NAV" , "TRAFFIC" ,
"SETUP" or "PHONE" button for
access to the corresponding menu,
turn the navigator to move the
selection,
press the navigator to confi rm the
selection,
or
press the "ESC" button to abandon
the current operation and return to
the previous display.
SCREEN (WITH PC NAV)
Controls
For more information on these applica-
tions, refer to the "Audio and Telemat-
ics" section or to the specifi c user guide
given to you with the other owner's docu-
ments.
!
48
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
Press the "SETUP" button to gain
access to the "SETUP" menu.
This allows you to select from the
following functions:
- "Languages",
- "Date and time",
- "Display",
- "Vehicle parameters",
- "Units",
- "System parameters".
Languages
This menu allows you to select the language
used by the display: Deutsch, English,
Espanol, Français, Italiano, Nederlands,
Polski, Portugues, Türkçe * .
Date and time
This menu allows you to set the date
and time, the format of the date and the
format of the time (refer to the "Audio
and Telematics" section or to the specifi c
user guide given to you with the other
owner's documents).
For safety reasons, confi guration
of the multifunction screen by the
driver must only be done when sta-
tionary.
System parameters
This menu allows you to restore the fac-
tory confi guration, display the software
version and activate scrolling text.
Vehicle parameters
This menu allows you to activate or
deactivate certain driving and comfort
equipment:
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer
to the "Visibility" section),
- guide-me-home and welcome lighting
(refer to the "Visibility" section),
- interior mood lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- daytime running lamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- rear parking sensors (refer to the
"Driving" section).
Display
This menu allows you to set the bright-
ness of the screen, the screen colour
scheme and the colour of the map (day/
night or auto mode).
Units
This menu allows you to select the
units: temperature (°C or °F) and con-
sumption (km/l, l/100 or mpg).
"SETUP" menu
* According to country.
i
49
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
16/9 HIGH DEFINITION
RETRACTABLE COLOUR
SCREEN (WITH PC COM 3D)
Displays on the screen
Once unfolded, it displays the following
information automatically and directly:
- time,
- date,
- altitude,
- ambient temperature (the value
displayed fl ashes if there is a risk of
ice),
- audio functions,
- parking sensors,
-
telephone and address book information,
- satellite navigation system information.
From the PC Com 3D control panel, to
select one of the applications:
press the dedicated "RADIO" ,
"MEDIA" , "NAV" , "TRAFFIC" ,
"ADDR BOOK" or "SETUP" button
for access to the corresponding
menu,
turn the navigator to move the
selection,
press the navigator to confi rm the
selection,
or
press the "ESC" button to abandon
the current operation and return to
the previous display.
For operation of the retractable
screen(opening, closing, adjustment
of the position, etc.), refer to the
paragraph "Access to the retractable
screen".
For more information on these applica-
tions, refer to the PC Com 3D part of the
"Audio and Telematics" section.
Controls
!
50
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
* According to country.
"SETUP" menu
Language and speech
This menu allows you to:
- select the language used by the
display (Deutsch, English, Espanol,
Français, Italiano, Nederlands,
Polski, Portugues, Portugues-Brasil,
Türkçe * ),
-
select the voice recognition parameters
(activation/deactivation, advice on
use, personal voice programming,
etc.),
- set the volume of the voice
synthesiser.
Date and time
This menu allows you to set the date
and time, the format of the date and the
format of the time (refer to the PC Com
3D part of the "Audio and Telematics"
section.
Display
This menu allows you to set the bright-
ness of the screen, the screen colour
scheme and the colour of the map (day/
night or auto mode).
Units
This menu allows you to select the
units: temperature (°C or °F) and dis-
tance (miles or km).
System
This menu allows you to restore the fac-
tory confi guration, display the software
version and activate scrolling text.
For safety reasons, confi guration
of the multifunction screen by the
driver must only be done when sta-
tionary.
Press the "SETUP" button to gain
access to the "SETUP" menu.
This allows you to select from the
following functions:
- "Language and speech",
- "Date and time",
- "Display",
- "Units",
- "System".
i
i
51
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
This screen is opened and stored auto-
matically.
However, you can also open it, store it
and adjust it using the various manual
controls:
- opening or storing by means of
control A ,
- angle adjustments by means of
control B .
It is also fi tted with safety auto-reverse
protection.
Opening the screen
With the screen stored, press
control A to open it.
The screen opens automatically when
the ignition is switched on, when the au-
dio and telematics system is switched
on, when an outgoing telephone call is
made, when a voice command is given
and when a warning message linked with
the STOP warning lamp is received.
Closing the screen
With the screen open, press control A
to store it.
The screen is stored automatically when
the ignition is switched off, after approxi-
mately three seconds, if the audio and
telematics system is off.
If you wish the screen to open or
close automatically when the audio
and telematics system is switched
on or off, the screen must not be
closed when the audio and tele-
matics system is operating.
When the screen is open, you can adjust
it precisely in different ways:
press the corresponding part of
control B to move the screen towards
you or towards the windscreen,
or
push or pull the screen gently by
hand.
Adjusting the position of the screen
Safety auto-reverse
If the screen meets an obstacle as it
opens or closes, the movement stops
immediately and is reversed by a few
millimetres.
After clearing the obstacle, issue the
command required again.
Storing the position of the screen
The system has four pre-set positions
in its memory.
Each time the screen is closed, the
system stores the last position of the
screen.
Each time the screen is re-opened, the
system returns the screen to the pre-set
position closest to that stored.
If you close the screen during op-
eration of the audio and telematics
system, it will re-open automatically
when an outgoing telephone call is
made, when a voice command is
given or when a warning message
linked with the STOP warning lamp
is received.
Access to the retractable screen
52
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
TRIP COMPUTER
Press the button, located at the end
of the wiper stalk , to display the
various items of trip computer data
in succession.
The trip computer provides the following
information:
System which provides current informa-
tion concerning the trip travelled (range,
fuel consumption...).
Press the control for more than
two seconds to reset to zero the
distance travelled, the average
fuel consumption and the average
speed.
Monochrome screen A
Zero reset
Data displays
- range,
- current fuel consumption,
- distance travelled,
- average fuel consumption,
- average speed.
The next press then returns you to
the normal display.
!
i
i
54
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
Route zero reset
With the monochrome screen C or
the instrument panel large screen
When the trip required is displayed,
press the control for more than two
seconds.
With the instrument panel PC Com
3D 16/9 large screen
A few definitions…
When the range falls below 20 miles
(30 km), dashes are displayed. After fi ll-
ing with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range
is recalculated and is displayed when it
exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
If dashes are displayed continu-
ously while driving in place of the
digits, contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
This value may vary following a
change in the style of driving or
the relief, resulting in a signifi cant
change in the current fuel con-
sumption.
Range
(miles or km)
This indicates the distance
which can still be travelled
with the fuel remaining in the tank in
relation to the average fuel consump-
tion over the last few miles (kilometres)
travelled.
Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
This is the average fuel con-
sumption during the last few
seconds.
Average fuel
consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
This is the average fuel con-
sumption since the last trip
computer zero reset.
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
This indicates the distance
travelled since the last trip
computer zero reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
This is the average speed calcu-
lated since the last trip computer
zero reset (ignition on).
Distance remaining to
destination
(miles or km)
This is the distance remaining
to be travelled to the fi nal destination. It
is either calculated instantly by the navi-
gation system, if guidance is activated,
or entered by the user.
If the distance is not entered, dashes
are displayed in place of the digits.
When the required trip is displayed,
press the "OK" button on the
navigator, associated with the PC
Com 3D, for more than two seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but
their use is identical.
Trip "1" permits, for example, daily calcula-
tions, and trip "2" monthly calculations.
i
53
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
- The current information
tab with:
the range,
the current fuel
consumption,
the distance remaining
to be travelled.
Monochrome screen C
Data displays
With the monochrome screen C or
the instrument panel large screen
Instrument panel PC Com 3D
16/9 large screen
- The trip "1" tab with:
the distance travelled,
the average fuel
consumption,
the average speed,
for the fi rst trip.
- The trip "2" tab with:
the distance travelled,
the average fuel
consumption,
the average speed,
for the second trip.
TRIP COMPUTER
System which provides current infor-
mation concerning the route travelled
(range, fuel consumption…).
Instrument panel large screen
Depending on your vehicle's equip-
ment, the trip computer informa-
tion appears on the multifunction
screen or on the large screen in the
instrument panel.
Pressing the button again takes you
to a black screen.
A further press returns you to the
normal display.
Press the button, located at the
end of the wiper stalk , to display
the various trip computer tabs in
succession.
With the instrument panel PC Com
3D 16/9 large screen
Press the up and down arrows on
the navigator, associated with the
PC Com 3D, to display the various
trip computer tabs in succession.
!
i
i
54
MULTIFUNCTION SCREENS
Route zero reset
With the monochrome screen C or
the instrument panel large screen
When the trip required is displayed,
press the control for more than two
seconds.
With the instrument panel PC Com
3D 16/9 large screen
A few definitions…
When the range falls below 20 miles
(30 km), dashes are displayed. After fi ll-
ing with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range
is recalculated and is displayed when it
exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
If dashes are displayed continu-
ously while driving in place of the
digits, contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
This value may vary following a
change in the style of driving or
the relief, resulting in a signifi cant
change in the current fuel con-
sumption.
Range
(miles or km)
This indicates the distance
which can still be travelled
with the fuel remaining in the tank in
relation to the average fuel consump-
tion over the last few miles (kilometres)
travelled.
Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
This is the average fuel con-
sumption during the last few
seconds.
Average fuel
consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
This is the average fuel con-
sumption since the last trip
computer zero reset.
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
This indicates the distance
travelled since the last trip
computer zero reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
This is the average speed calcu-
lated since the last trip computer
zero reset (ignition on).
Distance remaining to
destination
(miles or km)
This is the distance remaining
to be travelled to the fi nal destination. It
is either calculated instantly by the navi-
gation system, if guidance is activated,
or entered by the user.
If the distance is not entered, dashes
are displayed in place of the digits.
When the required trip is displayed,
press the "OK" button on the
navigator, associated with the PC
Com 3D, for more than two seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but
their use is identical.
Trip "1" permits, for example, daily calcula-
tions, and trip "2" monthly calculations.
55
COMFORT
VENTILATION
Air treatment
The incoming air follows various routes
depending on the controls selected by
the driver:
- direct arrival in the passenger
compartment (air intake),
- passage through a heating circuit
(heating),
- passage through a cooling circuit
(air conditioning).
The temperature control enables you to
obtain the level of comfort required by
mixing the air of the various circuits.
The air distribution control enables you
to diffuse the air in the passenger com-
partment combining several air vents.
The air fl ow control enables you to in-
crease or reduce the speed of the venti-
lation blower.
Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger com-
partment is fi ltered and originates either
from the outside via the grille located at
the base of the windscreen or from the
inside in air recirculation mode.
Control panel
The controls of this system are grouped
together on control panel A on the centre
console. Depending on the model, the
functions offered are:
- level of comfort required,
- air fl ow,
- air distribution,
- demisting and defrosting,
- manual or automatic air conditioning
controls.
Air diffusion
1. Windscreen demisting vents.
2. Front side window demisting/defrost-
ing vents.
3. Side adjustable air vents.
4. Central adjustable air vents.
5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
6. Adjustable air vents for the rear pas-
sengers.
7. Air outlets to the rear footwells.
i
i
56
COMFORT
If after an extended stop in sunshine,
the interior temperature is very high,
fi rst ventilate the passenger com-
partment for a few moments.
Put the air fl ow control at a setting
high enough to quickly change the
air in the passenger compartment.
The air conditioning system does not
contain chlorine and does not pres
ent
any danger to the ozone layer.
In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and main-
tenance guidelines below:
To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air
intake grilles located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents
and the air outlets, as well as the air extractor located in the boot.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used
for regulation of the air conditioning system.
Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or
twice a month to keep it in perfect working order.
Ensure that the passenger compartment fi lter is in good condition and
have the fi lter elements replaced regularly (refer to the "Checks" section).
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment fi lter.
Thanks to its special active additive, it contributes to the purifi cation of
the air breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger
compartment (reduction of allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy
deposits).
To guarantee correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also
advised to have it checked regularly as recommended in the Warranty and
Maintenance Record.
If the system does not produce cold air, deactivate it and contact a
PEUGEOT dealer.
When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures,
switching off the air conditioning increases the available engine power and so
improves the towing ability.
The condensation created by the
air conditioning results in a dis-
charge of water under the vehicle
which is perfectly normal.
i
57
COMFORT
2. Air fl ow adjustment
Turn the dial from position
1
to position 5 to obtain a
comfortable air fl ow.
Windscreen, side windows and
footwells.
Footwells.
Central and side vents.
Turn the dial from blue
(cold) to red (hot) to adjust
the temperature to your
requirements.
Windscreen and side windows.
1. Temperature adjustment
The air distribution can be
adapted by placing the dial in
an intermediate position.
The heating/ventilation or air conditioning
systems can only operate with the engine
running.
4. Air intake/Air recirculation
The intake of exterior air prevents the
formation of mist on the windscreen and
side windows.
The recirculation of interior air isolates
the passenger compartment from exte-
rior odours and smoke.
Return to exterior air intake as soon
as possible to prevent deterioration of
the the air quality and the formation of
mist.
If you place the air fl ow control
in position 0 (deactivation of the
system), the temperature is no
longer maintained at a comfortable
level. However, a slight fl ow of
air, due to the movement of the
vehicle, can still be felt.
3. Air distribution adjustment
Press the button to recir-
culate the interior air. The
indicator lamp comes on to
confi rm this.
Press the button again to permit the
intake of exterior air. The indicator
lamp switches off to confi rm this.
HEATING/VENTILATION
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING
58
COMFORT
5. Air conditioning On/Off
The air conditioning is de-
signed to operate effectively in
all seasons, with the windows
closed.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the
demisting in winter, above 3 °C.
Switching off
Press the "A/C" button again, the
associated green indicator lamp
switches off.
Switching on
Press the "A/C" button, the
associated green indicator lamp
comes on.
The air conditioning does not op-
erate when the air fl ow adjustment
control 2 is in position "0".
FRONT DEMIST - DEFROST
These markings on the control
panel indicate the control po-
sitions for rapid demisting or
defrosting of the windscreen
and side windows.
With the heating/ventilation
system
Put the temperature and air fl ow
controls to the dedicated marked
position.
Put the air intake control to the
"Exterior air intake" position
(control indicator lamp off).
Put the air distribution control to the
"Windscreen" position.
With the manual air
conditioning system
Put the temperature and air fl ow
controls to the dedicated marked
position.
Put the air intake control to the
"Exterior air intake" position
(indicator lamp on the control off).
Put the air distribution control to the
"Windscreen" position.
Switch on the air conditioning by
pressing the "A/C" button; the
associated green warning lamp
comes on.
58
COMFORT
5. Air conditioning On/Off
The air conditioning is de-
signed to operate effectively in
all seasons, with the windows
closed.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the
demisting in winter, above 3 °C.
Switching off
Press the "A/C" button again, the
associated green indicator lamp
switches off.
Switching on
Press the "A/C" button, the
associated green indicator lamp
comes on.
The air conditioning does not op-
erate when the air fl ow adjustment
control 2 is in position "0".
FRONT DEMIST - DEFROST
These markings on the control
panel indicate the control po-
sitions for rapid demisting or
defrosting of the windscreen
and side windows.
With the heating/ventilation
system
Put the temperature and air fl ow
controls to the dedicated marked
position.
Put the air intake control to the
"Exterior air intake" position
(control indicator lamp off).
Put the air distribution control to the
"Windscreen" position.
With the manual air
conditioning system
Put the temperature and air fl ow
controls to the dedicated marked
position.
Put the air intake control to the
"Exterior air intake" position
(indicator lamp on the control off).
Put the air distribution control to the
"Windscreen" position.
Switch on the air conditioning by
pressing the "A/C" button; the
associated green warning lamp
comes on.
i
59
COMFORT
The control button is located on
the heating or air conditioning
system control panel.
REAR SCREEN DEMIST -
DEFROST
Switch off the demisting/
defrosting of the rear screen
and door mirrors as soon as
appropriate as lower current
consumption results in reduced
fuel consumption.
If the engine is switched off before
the demisting/defrosting is switched
off automatically, demisting/defro-
sting will resume next time the en-
gine is switched on.
Switching on
The rear screen demisting/defrosting
can only operate when the engine is
running.
Press this button to demist/defrost
the rear screen and (depending
on version) the door mirrors. The
indicator lamp associated with the
button comes on.
Switching off
The demisting/defrosting switches off
automatically to prevent an excessive
consumption of current.
It is possible to stop the demisting/
defrosting operation before it is
switched off automatically by pressing
the button again. The indicator lamp
associated with the button switches
off.
i i
60
COMFORT
When the engine is cold, to prevent
too great a distribution of cold air,
the air fl ow will reach its optimum
level gradually.
In cold weather, it favours the dis-
tribution of warm air to the wind-
screen, side windows and footwells
only.
On entering the vehicle, if the in-
terior temperature is much colder
or warmer than the comfort value,
there is no need to change the val-
ue displayed in order to obtain the
comfort required. The system cor-
rects the difference in temperature
automatically and as quickly as
possible.
The air conditioning only operates when
the engine is running.
The driver and his front pas-
senger can each adjust the
temperature to their require-
ments.
Turn control 2 or 3 to the left or to
the right respectively to decrease or
increase this value.
A setting around the value 21 provides
optimum comfort. However, depend-
ing on your requirements, a setting be-
tween 18 and 24 is normal.
You are advised to avoid a left/right set-
ting difference of more than 3.
4. Automatic visibility programme
The automatic comfort pro-
gramme may not be suffi cient
to quickly demist or defrost
the windscreen and side win-
dows (humidity, several pas-
sengers, ice, etc.).
Automatic operation
Press the "AUTO" button.
The indicator lamp on the
button comes on.
2. Driver's side adjustment
DUAL-ZONE DIGITAL AIR
CONDITIONING
We recommend the use of this mode: it
permits automatic and optimised adjust-
ment of all of the functions, passenger
compartment temperature, air fl ow, air
distribution and air recirculation, in ac-
cordance with the comfort value that you
have chosen.
This system is designed to operate ef-
fectively in all seasons, with the windows
closed.
The value indicated on the display cor-
responds to a level of comfort and not
to a temperature in degrees Celsius or
Fahrenheit.
To switch it off, press the "visibility"
button again or press the "AUTO"
button, the indicator lamp on the
button switches off and the indicator
lamp on the "AUTO" button comes
on.
1. Automatic comfort programme
3. Passenger side adjustment
In this case, select the automatic
visibility programme.
The system automatically controls the
air conditioning, the air fl ow and the air
intake and provides optimum distribu-
tion of the ventilation to the windscreen
and side windows.
!
i
61
COMFORT
Manual operation
If you wish, you can make a different
choice from that offered by the system
by changing a setting. The other func-
tions will still be controlled automati-
cally.
Pressing the "AUTO" button returns
the system to completely automatic
operation.
Press this button to switch
off the air conditioning.
6. Air distribution adjustment
Press one or more buttons to
direct the air fl ow towards:
7. Air fl ow adjustment
Turn this control to the left
to decrease the air fl ow or
to the right to increase the
air fl ow.
8. Air intake/Air recirculation
Switching the system off
Turn the air fl ow control to the left
until all of the indicator lamps switch
off.
This action switches off the air condi-
tioning and the ventilation.
Temperature related comfort is no longer
guaranteed but a slight fl ow of air, due
to the movement of the vehicle, can still
be felt.
Turn the air fl ow dial to the right
or press the "AUTO" button to
reactivate the system with the values
set before it was switched off.
Press this button for
recirculation of the interior
air. The indicator lamp on
the button comes on.
5. Air conditioning On/Off
Avoid prolonged operation in inte-
rior air recirculation mode or driving
for long periods with the system off
(risk of condensation and deterio-
ration of the air quality).
- the windscreen and side windows
(demisting or defrosting),
- the windscreen, the side windows
and the vents,
- the windscreen, the side windows,
the vents and the footwells,
- the vents and the footwells,
- the vents,
- the footwells,
- the windscreen, the side windows
and the footwells.
The air fl ow indicator lamps, between
the two fans, come on progressively in
relation to the value requested.
As soon as possible, press this
button again to permit the intake of
outside air and prevent the formation
of condensation. The indicator lamp
on the button switches off.
For maximum cooling or heating
of the passenger compartment, it
is possible to exceed the minimum
value 14 or the maximum value 28.
Turn control 2 or 3 to the left
until "LO" is displayed or to the
right until "HI" is displayed.
9. Mono-zone/Dual-zone
Press this button to equalise
the comfort value on the
passenger side with that
on the driver's side (mono
zone). The indicator lamp
on the button comes on.
Air recirculation enables the passenger
compartment to be isolated from exte-
rior odours and smoke.
Switching the system off could result in
discomfort (humidity, condensation).
Press this button again to return
to automatic operation of the air
conditioning. The indicator lamp on
the "A/C" button comes on.
62
COMFORT
FRONT SEATS
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat
back and a head restraint which can all
be adjusted to adapt your position for
ease of driving and comfort.
Forwards-backwards adjustment
Raise the control and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
Driver's or passenger's seat height
adjustment
Pull the control upwards to raise
or push it downwards to lower, as
many times as necessary, to obtain
the position required.
Seat back angle adjustment
Push the control rearwards.
Manual adjustments
i
63
COMFORT
FRONT SEATS
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat
back and a head restraint which can all
be adjusted to adapt your position for
ease of driving and comfort.
Forwards-backwards adjustment
Push the control forwards or
rearwards to slide the seat.
Seat cushion height and angle
adjustment
Tilt the rear part of the control
upwards or downwards to obtain the
required height.
Tilt the front part of the control
upwards or downwards to obtain the
required angle.
Seat back angle adjustment
Tilt the control forwards or rearwards
to adjust the angle of the seat back.
Driver's seat electric
adjustments
The electrical functions of the driv-
er's seat are deactivated approxi-
mately one minute after the ignition
is switched off.
To reactivate them, switch on the
ignition.
!
i
64
COMFORT
Access to the rear seats (3-door)
Pull the control upwards to fold
the seat back and move the seat
forward.
When put back in place, the seat
returns to its initial position.
Head restraint height adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull it
forwards and upwards at the same
time.
To remove the head restraint, press
the lug A and pull the head restraint
upwards.
To put the head restraint back in
place, engage the head restraint
stems in the openings keeping them
in line with the seat back.
To lower the head restraint, press
the lug A and the head restraint at
the same time.
The head restraint is fi tted with a
frame with notches which prevents
it from lowering; this is a safety de-
vice in case of impact.
The adjustment is correct when
the upper edge of the head re-
straint is level with the top of the
head.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place and
adjusted correctly.
Lumbar adjustment
Turn the dial to obtain the correct
lumbar position.
Additional adjustments
Ensure that no person or object
prevents the seat slide from return-
ing to its initial position; the return to
this position is necessary for longi-
tudinal locking.
i
65
COMFORT
Table position for front
passenger seat
Placing this seat in the table position, with
the rear seats also in the table position,
allows you to transport long objects.
Pull the control upwards to fold the
seat back onto the seat cushion.
To lower the seat back fully, tilt the
seat back angle adjustment control.
Pull the control again to release the
seat back and raise it.
When put back in place, the seat
back returns to its initial position.
Do not forget to fold the "aircraft"
type table fi xed on the back of the
seat fi rst.
Heated seats control
With the engine running, the front seats
can be heated separately.
Use the adjustment dial, placed on
the side of each front seat, to switch
on and select the level of heating
required:
0 : Off.
1 : Low.
2 : Medium.
3 : High.
i
!
66
COMFORT
Storing driving positions
System which takes into account the
electrical settings of the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors. It enables you to
store up to two positions using the but-
tons on the side of the driver's seat and
two further driving positions using the
two remote control keys.
Recalling a stored position
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driv-
er's seat and the door mirrors return to
the position stored by the remote con-
trol key.
Storing a position
Storing a new position cancels the
previous position.
When the ignition is off, after a few
consecutive position recalls, the
function will be deactivated until
the engine is started, to prevent
discharging of the battery.
Using the remote control keys
When the vehicle is locked, the remote
control key stores the position of the
driver's seat and door mirrors.
Each remote control key can store one
specifi c setting.
Ignition on
Briefl y press button 1 or 2 to recall
the corresponding position.
An audible signal is heard indicating
the end of the adjustment.
Vehicle moving
Press and hold button 1 or 2 until
the audible signal is heard indicating
the end of the adjustment.
Using buttons M/1/2
Switch on the ignition.
Adjust your seat and the door
mirrors.
Press button M , then press button 1
or 2 within four seconds.
An audible signal is heard indicating
that the position has been stored.
i
65
COMFORT
Table position for front
passenger seat
Placing this seat in the table position, with
the rear seats also in the table position,
allows you to transport long objects.
Pull the control upwards to fold the
seat back onto the seat cushion.
To lower the seat back fully, tilt the
seat back angle adjustment control.
Pull the control again to release the
seat back and raise it.
When put back in place, the seat
back returns to its initial position.
Do not forget to fold the "aircraft"
type table fi xed on the back of the
seat fi rst.
Heated seats control
With the engine running, the front seats
can be heated separately.
Use the adjustment dial, placed on
the side of each front seat, to switch
on and select the level of heating
required:
0 : Off.
1 : Low.
2 : Medium.
3 : High.
!
67
COMFORT
REAR SEATS
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place
and in the high position when pas-
sengers are seated in the rear.
Rear head restraints
These have a high position (comfort
and safety) and a low position (rear visi-
bility).
They can also be removed.
To remove a head restraint:
pull the head restraint fully forwards
and upwards at the same time,
then, press the lug A .
Removing the seat cushion
Move the corresponding front seat
forwards if necessary.
Raise the seat cushion 1 lifting it
with a hand from the rear.
Tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against
the front seat.
Remove the seat cushion 1 from its
fi xings by pulling upwards.
Refitting the seat cushion
Position the seat cushion 1 vertically in
its fi xings.
Fold down the seat cushion 1 .
Press on the seat cushion to secure it.
Bench seat, the left-hand (2/3) or right-
hand (1/3) section of which can be folded
to adapt the boot load space.
!
i
68
COMFORT
Folding the seat
In order to fold a rear seat without any
risk of damage, always start with the
seat cushion, never with the seat
back:
move the corresponding front seat
forwards if necessary,
raise the seat cushion 1 lifting it with
a hand from the rear,
tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against
the front seat,
Returning the seat back to its
original position
When returning the rear seat back to its
original position:
put the seat back 3 in the upright
position and secure it,
fold the seat cushion 1 ,
refi t the head restraints or put them
back in place.
check that the seat belt is positioned
correctly on the side of the seat
back,
lower or remove the head restraints
if necessary,
pull the control 2 forwards to release
the seat back 3 ,
tilt the seat back 3 .
When returning the rear seat back
to its original position, take care not
to trap the seat belts and ensure
that their buckles are positioned
correctly.
The seat cushion 1 can be removed
to increase the loading volume.
i i
i
69
COMFORT
REAR SEATS
Forwards-backwards adjustment
Seat back angle adjustment
Pull one of the straps B , located
at the front of the seat, then adjust
the angle to one of the 7 positions
offered.
Release the strap to lock the seat
back in this position.
Table position
Raise the bar A and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
Place the head restraint in the low
position.
Pull one of the straps B , located at
the front of the seat.
Fold the seat back fully onto the
seat cushion; the seat automatically
moves back fully.
Press on the seat back to lock it.
Folding
Once the seat has been placed in the
table position, carry out the following
operations:
move back the seat fully using the
bar A ,
raise the lever C , located at the rear
right of the seat, to release the rear
feet,
raise the seat fully so that it remains
in the fully folded position.
You can also carry out these oper-
ations from the 3rd row using one
of the straps B , located at the rear
of the seat.
These operations allow access to
the 3
rd row, exit from the 3 rd row
and folding of the seats from the
boot.
In the 2nd row, these three seats are
identical and can be adjusted for your
comfort. They can be placed in the table
position, folded or removed to obtain a
variety of loading confi gurations.
During the forwards-backwards and
seat back angle adjustment opera-
tions, take care not to apply any force
to the load space cover roller.
!
70
COMFORT
Removal Installation
Once the seat has been folded, carry
out the following operations:
pull the red strap D to release the
front feet of the seat,
lift the seat and carry it using the
carrying handle E .
Never use the adjustment straps
to remove, install or carry a seat;
use the carrying handle E provided
for this purpose (weight of the seat:
approximately 18 kg).
Once the seat has been removed,
in order to protect its electronic
systems, it must be stored in a
clean, dry location sheltered from
bad weather.
Locked Released
Tilt the folded seat rearwards; the front
and rear feet lock automatically.
Pull one of the straps B to release the
seat back, then raise it.
Check that no object is obstructing
the anchorages on the fl oor, so
preventing correct locking seat's
feet.
Carry the seat using the carrying
handle E .
Put the front feet of the seat in place
in the corresponding anchorages.
Raise the lever C to check that the
rear feet are released.
!
71
COMFORT
ADDITIONAL SEATS
Table position
Place the head restraint in the low
position.
Pull the strap A , located at the rear
left of the seat.
Fold the seat back onto the seat
cushion.
Folding
Once the seat has been placed in the
table position, carry out the following
operations:
remove the load space cover roller,
raise the bar B , located at the rear of
the seat, to release the rear feet,
raise the seat and secure it to the
head restraint rod of the 2nd row
seat, using the integrated retaining
strap C .
Removal
Once the seat has been folded, carry
out the following operations:
pull the red strap D to release the
front feet of the seat,
lift the seat and carry it using the
carrying handle E ,
put the anchorage covers back in
place to obtain a fl at boot fl oor.
Never use the adjustment and re-
taining straps to remove, install
or carry a seat; use the carrying
handle E provided for this purpose
(weight of the seat: approximately
15 kg).
In the 3rd row, these two seats are iden-
tical and are used for the occasional
carrying of additional passengers. They
can be placed in the table position,
folded or removed to obtain a variety of
loading confi gurations.
72
COMFORT
Installation
First remove the anchorage covers
on the fl oor.
Carry the seat using the carrying
handle E .
Put the seat's front feet in place in
the corresponding anchorages.
Raise the bar B to check that the
rear feet are released.
Tilt the folded seat rearwards; the
front and rear feet lock automati-
cally.
Raise the seat back.
i
!
73
COMFORT
SEAT MODULARITY
AND VARIOUS
CONFIGURATIONS
Examples of configurations
7 seats
Operations to change the existing
confi guration must only be carried
out when stationary (see the "Rear
seats" and "Additional seats" sec-
tions of the SW with panoramic
sunroof).
Special features
The outer seats of the 2nd row can be
moved inwards, once the central seat
has been removed.
The 2nd row seats can be installed in
the 3rd row.
Conversely, the 3rd row seats cannot
be installed in the 2nd row.
5 seats with additional seats folded
Do not seat passengers in the 3rd
row if the 2nd row seats are in the
fully folded position.
Designed to be modular, your vehicle
offers numerous seat installation and
loading confi gurations.
74
COMFORT
5 seats
5 seats with 2nd row seats moved inwards
Transporting long objects
Loading a large volume
!
76
COMFORT
Adjustment
Adjust the mirror so that the glass
is directed correctly in the "day"
position.
As a safety precaution, the mirrors
must be adjusted to reduce the
"blind spot".
Manual day/night model
Day/night position
Pull the lever to change to the "night"
anti-dazzle position.
Push the lever to change to the
normal "day" position.
Automatic tilting in reverse gear
System which provides a view of the
ground during parking manoeuvres in
reverse gear.
Switching on
With the engine running, engage
reverse gear.
Move control A to the right or to
the left to select the corresponding
mirror.
The glass of the mirror selected tilts
downwards, in accordance with its pro-
gramming.
Programming
With the engine running, engage
reverse gear.
Select and adjust the left-hand and
right-hand mirrors in succession.
The adjustment is stored immediately.
Switching off
Exit reverse gear and wait ten
seconds.
or
Return control A to the central
position.
The mirror glass returns to its initial po-
sition.
The mirror glass also returns to its initial
position:
- if the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h),
- if the engine is switched off.
Rear view mirror
Adjustable mirror providing a central
rearward view.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system,
useful in poor light.
!
76
COMFORT
Adjustment
Adjust the mirror so that the glass
is directed correctly in the "day"
position.
As a safety precaution, the mirrors
must be adjusted to reduce the
"blind spot".
Manual day/night model
Day/night position
Pull the lever to change to the "night"
anti-dazzle position.
Push the lever to change to the
normal "day" position.
Automatic tilting in reverse gear
System which provides a view of the
ground during parking manoeuvres in
reverse gear.
Switching on
With the engine running, engage
reverse gear.
Move control A to the right or to
the left to select the corresponding
mirror.
The glass of the mirror selected tilts
downwards, in accordance with its pro-
gramming.
Programming
With the engine running, engage
reverse gear.
Select and adjust the left-hand and
right-hand mirrors in succession.
The adjustment is stored immediately.
Switching off
Exit reverse gear and wait ten
seconds.
or
Return control A to the central
position.
The mirror glass returns to its initial po-
sition.
The mirror glass also returns to its initial
position:
- if the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h),
- if the engine is switched off.
Rear view mirror
Adjustable mirror providing a central
rearward view.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system,
useful in poor light.
!
i
77
COMFORT
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
When stationary , pull the control
lever to release the steering wheel.
Adjust the height and reach to suit
your driving position.
Push the control lever to lock the
steering wheel.
As a safety precaution, these ope-
rations should only be carried out
while the vehicle is stationary.
Automatic day/night model
It has an anti-dazzle system which dark-
ens the mirror glass: this reduces any
driver discomfort caused by the light
beam of following vehicles, the sun...
In order to guarantee optimum visi-
bility during your manoeuvres, the
mirror lightens automatically when
reverse gear is engaged.
By means of a sensor, which measures
the light from the rear of the vehicle, this
system automatically and progressively
changes between the day and night
uses.
!
i
77
COMFORT
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
When stationary , pull the control
lever to release the steering wheel.
Adjust the height and reach to suit
your driving position.
Push the control lever to lock the
steering wheel.
As a safety precaution, these ope-
rations should only be carried out
while the vehicle is stationary.
Automatic day/night model
It has an anti-dazzle system which dark-
ens the mirror glass: this reduces any
driver discomfort caused by the light
beam of following vehicles, the sun...
In order to guarantee optimum visi-
bility during your manoeuvres, the
mirror lightens automatically when
reverse gear is engaged.
By means of a sensor, which measures
the light from the rear of the vehicle, this
system automatically and progressively
changes between the day and night
uses.
i
i
78
ACCESS
REMOTE CONTROL KEY
System which permits central unlock-
ing or locking of the vehicle using the
lock or from a distance. It is also used to
locate and start the vehicle, as well as
providing protection against theft.
Unfolding the key
First press this button to unfold the
key.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the open padlock to
unlock the vehicle.
Complete unlocking using the key
Turn the key to the left in the driver's
door lock to unlock the vehicle.
Unlocking is confi rmed by rapid fl ashing
of the direction indicators for approxi-
mately two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
unfold at the same time.
Complete unlocking using the
remote control
Unlocking and partial
opening of the rear
screen
If one of the doors, the rear screen
or the boot is still open, the central
locking does not take place.
When the vehicle is locked, if it is
unlocked inadvertently, it will relock
automatically after thirty seconds
unless a door is opened.
Normal locking using the key
Turn the key to the right in the
driver's door lock to lock the vehicle
completely.
Locking is confi rmed by fi xed lighting of
the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
fold at the same time.
Locking the vehicle
Press the closed padlock to
lock the vehicle completely.
Press the closed padlock for more
than two seconds to close the
windows automatically in addition to
locking.
Normal locking using the remote
control
Press this button for more
than two seconds to unlock
the rear screen. This action
unlocks the vehicle fi rst.
The boot and the rear screen
cannot both be open at the same
time.
!
i
79
ACCESS
Deadlocking renders the exterior
and interior door controls inopera-
tive.
It also deactivates the manual cen-
tral control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone in-
side the vehicle when it is dead-
locked.
Deadlocking using the remote
control
Deadlocking using the key
The folding and unfolding of the
door mirrors using the remote
control can be deactivated by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Press the closed padlock
to lock the vehicle com-
pletely or press the closed
padlock for more than two
seconds to close the win-
dows automatically in ad-
dition to locking (according
to version).
Press the closed padlock again
within fi ve seconds to deadlock the
vehicle.
Deadlocking is confi rmed by fi xed light-
ing of the direction indicators for ap-
proximately two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
fold at the same time.
Turn the key to the right in the
driver's door lock to lock the vehicle
completely and hold it in this
position for more than two seconds
to close the windows automatically
in addition to locking (according to
version).
Turn the key to the right again
within fi ve seconds to deadlock the
vehicle.
Folding the key
First press button A to fold the key.
Locating your vehicle
This function allows you to identify your
vehicle from a distance, particularly in
poor light. Your vehicle must be locked.
Press the closed padlock on the
remote control.
This will switch on the courtesy lamps
and the direction indicators will fl ash for
a few seconds.
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip
which has a special code. When the
ignition is switched on, this code must
be recognised in order for starting to be
possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks
the engine management system a few
minutes after the ignition is switched off
and prevents starting of the engine by
anyone who does not have the key.
Anti-theft protection
In the event of a malfunction,
you are informed by lighting of
this warning lamp, an audible
signal and a message on the
multifunction screen.
In this case, your vehicle does not start;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as
possible.
i
!
80
ACCESS
Starting the vehicle
Insert the key in the ignition switch.
The system recognises the starting
code.
Turn the key fully towards the
dashboard to position 3 (Starting) .
When the engine starts, release the
key.
Switching the vehicle off
Immobilise the vehicle.
Turn the key fully towards you to
position 1 (Stop) .
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle
battery, replacement of the remote con-
trol battery or in the event of a remote
control malfunction, you can no longer
unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.
First of all, use the key in the lock to
unlock or lock your vehicle.
Then, reinitialise the remote control.
If the problem persists, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
Changing the battery
Battery ref.: CR1620/3 volts.
Reinitialisation
Switch off the ignition.
Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition) .
Press the closed padlock immedi-
ately for a few seconds.
Switch off the ignition and remove
the key from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational
again.
If the battery is fl at, you are in-
formed by lighting of this warn-
ing lamp, an audible signal and
a message on the multifunction
screen.
This replacement battery is available
from PEUGEOT dealers.
Key left in the "Ignition"
position
If the key has been left in the ignition
switch, the ignition will be switched
off automatically after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn
the key to position 1 (Stop) , then
back to position 2 (Ignition) .
Unclip the casing using a coin at the
notch.
Slide the fl at battery out of its
location.
Slide the new battery into its location
observing the original direction.
Clip the casing.
Reinitialise the remote control.
A heavy object (key fob...), attached
to the key and weighing down on
its shaft in the ignition switch, could
cause a malfunction.
!
81
ACCESS
Lost keys
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's V5 registration document and your
personal identifi cation documents.
The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder
code required to order a replacement key.
Do not throw the remote control bat-
teries away, they contain metals which
are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it
while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle,
without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and
out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the
remote control would have to be reinitialised.
The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition, even
when the ignition is switched off, except for reinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compart-
ment by the emergency services more diffi cult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the igni-
tion when you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifi cations to the electronic engine immobiliser system;
this could cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by a PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the
keys in your possession are the only ones which can start the vehicle.
!
i
79
ACCESS
Deadlocking renders the exterior
and interior door controls inopera-
tive.
It also deactivates the manual cen-
tral control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone in-
side the vehicle when it is dead-
locked.
Deadlocking using the remote
control
Deadlocking using the key
The folding and unfolding of the
door mirrors using the remote
control can be deactivated by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Press the closed padlock
to lock the vehicle com-
pletely or press the closed
padlock for more than two
seconds to close the win-
dows automatically in ad-
dition to locking (according
to version).
Press the closed padlock again
within fi ve seconds to deadlock the
vehicle.
Deadlocking is confi rmed by fi xed light-
ing of the direction indicators for ap-
proximately two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
fold at the same time.
Turn the key to the right in the
driver's door lock to lock the vehicle
completely and hold it in this
position for more than two seconds
to close the windows automatically
in addition to locking (according to
version).
Turn the key to the right again
within fi ve seconds to deadlock the
vehicle.
Folding the key
First press button A to fold the key.
Locating your vehicle
This function allows you to identify your
vehicle from a distance, particularly in
poor light. Your vehicle must be locked.
Press the closed padlock on the
remote control.
This will switch on the courtesy lamps
and the direction indicators will fl ash for
a few seconds.
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip
which has a special code. When the
ignition is switched on, this code must
be recognised in order for starting to be
possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks
the engine management system a few
minutes after the ignition is switched off
and prevents starting of the engine by
anyone who does not have the key.
Anti-theft protection
In the event of a malfunction,
you are informed by lighting of
this warning lamp, an audible
signal and a message on the
multifunction screen.
In this case, your vehicle does not start;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as
possible.
!
81
ACCESS
Lost keys
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's V5 registration document and your
personal identifi cation documents.
The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder
code required to order a replacement key.
Do not throw the remote control bat-
teries away, they contain metals which
are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it
while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle,
without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and
out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the
remote control would have to be reinitialised.
The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition, even
when the ignition is switched off, except for reinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compart-
ment by the emergency services more diffi cult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the igni-
tion when you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifi cations to the electronic engine immobiliser system;
this could cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by a PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the
keys in your possession are the only ones which can start the vehicle.
i
!
80
ACCESS
Starting the vehicle
Insert the key in the ignition switch.
The system recognises the starting
code.
Turn the key fully towards the
dashboard to position 3 (Starting) .
When the engine starts, release the
key.
Switching the vehicle off
Immobilise the vehicle.
Turn the key fully towards you to
position 1 (Stop) .
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle
battery, replacement of the remote con-
trol battery or in the event of a remote
control malfunction, you can no longer
unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.
First of all, use the key in the lock to
unlock or lock your vehicle.
Then, reinitialise the remote control.
If the problem persists, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
Changing the battery
Battery ref.: CR1620/3 volts.
Reinitialisation
Switch off the ignition.
Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition) .
Press the closed padlock immedi-
ately for a few seconds.
Switch off the ignition and remove
the key from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational
again.
If the battery is fl at, you are in-
formed by lighting of this warn-
ing lamp, an audible signal and
a message on the multifunction
screen.
This replacement battery is available
from PEUGEOT dealers.
Key left in the "Ignition"
position
If the key has been left in the ignition
switch, the ignition will be switched
off automatically after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn
the key to position 1 (Stop) , then
back to position 2 (Ignition) .
Unclip the casing using a coin at the
notch.
Slide the fl at battery out of its
location.
Slide the new battery into its location
observing the original direction.
Clip the casing.
Reinitialise the remote control.
A heavy object (key fob...), attached
to the key and weighing down on
its shaft in the ignition switch, could
cause a malfunction.
!
i
82
ACCESS
ALARM
System which protects and provides a
deterrent against the theft of your vehi-
cle. It provides two types of protection,
exterior and interior, as well as a self-
protection function.
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm
Do not make any modifi cations to
the alarm system, this could cause
malfunctions.
Activation
Switch off the ignition and get out of
the vehicle.
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using
the locking button on the remote
control.
The alarm is activated; the indicator lamp
on button A fl ashes once per second.
The exterior perimeter protection is acti-
vated, 5 seconds after the locking button
on the remote control is pressed.
The interior volumetric protection is acti-
vated, 45 seconds after the locking but-
ton on the remote control is pressed.
Exterior perimeter protection
The system detects opening of the ve-
hicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to
enter the vehicle by forcing a door, the
boot or the bonnet.
Interior volumetric protection
The system detects any variation in the
volume in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks
a window or moves inside the vehicle.
If you wish to leave a pet in the vehicle
or a window partially open, deactivate
the interior volumetric protection.
Self-protection function
The system detects the putting out of
service of its components.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries
to put the wires of the siren, the central
control or the battery out of service.
Deactivation
Unlock the vehicle using the
unlocking button on the remote
control.
The alarm is deactivated; the indicator
lamp on button A switches off.
If an opening - door or boot - is
not closed fully, the vehicle is not
locked, but the exterior perimeter
protection will be activated after
45 seconds at the same time as
the interior volumetric protection.
!
i
83
ACCESS
Triggering of the alarm
If the alarm is triggered ten times in
succession, the eleventh time will
result in it becoming inactive.
If the indicator lamp on button A
fl ashes rapidly, this indicates that
the alarm was triggered during
your absence. When the ignition is
switched on, this fl ashing stops im-
mediately.
To avoid triggering the alarm when
washing your vehicle, lock it using
the key in the driver's door lock.
Unlock the vehicle using the key in
the driver's door lock.
Open the door; the alarm is
triggered.
Switch on the ignition; the alarm
stops.
Malfunction
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using
the key in the driver's door lock.
Automatic activation *
This is indicated by sounding of the si-
ren and fl ashing of the direction indica-
tors for approximately thirty seconds.
After it has been triggered, both types of
protection are again operational.
Failure of the remote control
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
When the ignition is switched on, light-
ing of the indicator lamp on button A for
ten seconds indicates a siren fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
* According to country.
2 minutes after the last door or the boot
is closed, the alarm is activated auto-
matically.
To avoid triggering the alarm on
entering the vehicle, fi rst press the
unlocking button on the remote
control.
To be effective, this deactivation
must be carried out each time the
ignition is switched off.
Reactivation of the interior
volumetric protection
Unlock the vehicle using the
unlocking button on the remote
control.
Relock the vehicle using the remote
control.
The alarm is activated again with both
types of protection; the indicator lamp
on button A fl ashes once per second.
Locking the vehicle with exterior
perimeter protection only
Deactivation of the interior
volumetric protection
Switch off the ignition.
Within ten seconds, press button A
until the indicator lamp is lit
continuously.
Get out of the vehicle.
Lock or deadlock the vehicle without
delay using the locking button on
the remote control.
The exterior perimeter protection alone
remains activated; the indicator lamp on
button A fl ashes once per second.
i
i
!
84
ACCESS
The electric window controls re-
main operational for approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is
switched off or until the vehicle is
locked after a door is opened.
If one of the passenger windows
cannot be operated from the driv-
er's door control panel, carry out
the operation from the control panel
of the passenger door concerned,
and vice versa.
ELECTRIC WINDOWS
Fitted with a safety anti-pinch system
and a deactivation system to prevent
misuse of the rear controls.
1. Driver's electric window control.
2. Passenger's electric window
control.
3. Rear right electric window
control.
4. Rear left electric window control.
5. Deactivation of the rear electric
window and door controls.
If the window cannot be closed (for
example, in the presence of ice),
immediately after the movement is
reversed:
press and hold the control until
the window opens fully,
then pull the control immediately
and hold it until the window
closes,
continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after
the window has closed.
The safety anti - pinch function is
not operational during these op-
erations.
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an
obstacle, it stops and partially lowers
again.
- automatic mode
Press or pull the control fi rmly.
The window opens or closes fully
when the control is released.
Pressing the control again stops
the movement of the window.
One-touch electric windows
There are two options:
- manual mode
Press or pull the control gently.
The window stops when the
control is released.
After approximately ten consecutive
complete opening/closing move-
ments of the window, a protection
function is activated which only au-
thorises closing of the window to
prevent damage to the electric win-
dow motor.
Once the window is closed, the con-
trols will become available again
after approximately 40 minutes.
!
i
!
85
ACCESS
This control also deactivates the
interior controls for the rear doors
(refer to the section "Child safety -
§ Electric child lock").
Any other status of the indicator
light indicates a malfunction of the
electric child lock. Have it checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Reinitialisation
If a window does not rise automatically,
its operation must be reinitialised:
pull the control until the window
stops,
release the control and pull it again
until the window closes fully,
continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the
window has closed,
press the control to lower the window
automatically to the low position,
when the window has reached the
low position, press the control again
for approximately one second.
Always remove the key from the
ignition when leaving the vehicle,
even for a short time.
If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows,
you must reverse the movement of
the window. To do this, press the
control concerned.
When the driver operates the con-
trols for the passengers' electric
windows, they must ensure that no
one is preventing correct closing of
the windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric win-
dows correctly.
Be aware of children when operat-
ing the windows.
Deactivation of the rear electric
window and door controls
For the safety of your children, press
control 5 to deactivate the rear
electric window controls regardless
of their position.
Indicator lamp on, the rear controls are
deactivated.
Indicator lamp off, the rear controls are
activated.
The safety anti - pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
!
86
ACCESS
DOORS
After unlocking the vehicle com-
pletely using the remote control or
the key, pull the door handle.
From inside
Pull on the front door control to open
the door; this unlocks the vehicle
completely.
Pull on the rear door control to
open the door; this unlocks the door
concerned only.
Closing
When a door is not closed correctly:
- when the engine is running ,
this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by a message
on the multifunction screen
for a few seconds,
- when the vehicle is moving (speed
higher than 6 mph (10 km/h)), this
warning lamp comes on, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message
on the multifunction screen for a few
seconds.
Opening
From outside
Version with deadlocking
The interior door controls do not
operate when the vehicle is dead-
locked.
i
!
i
87
ACCESS
If the vehicle is locked or dead-
locked from the outside, the red in-
dicator lamp fl ashes and button A
is inactive.
In this case, use the remote
control or the key to unlock the
vehicle.
If one of the doors is open, the auto-
matic central locking does not take
place.
If the boot or the rear screen is
open, the automatic central locking
of the doors is active.
Manual centralised control
System which provides full manual
locking or unlocking of the doors from
the inside.
Locking
Press button A to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Automatic centralised control
System which provides full automatic
locking or unlocking of the doors, the
boot and the rear screen while driving.
You can activate or deactivate this
function.
Activation
Press button A for more than
two seconds.
A confi rmation message appears on the
multifunction screen, accompanied by
an audible signal.
Unlocking
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press button A
to unlock the doors, the boot and the
rear screen temporarily.
If one of the doors is open, the cen-
tral locking from the inside does not
take place.
Unlocking
Press button A again to unlock the
vehicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button
switches off.
Locking
When the speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the doors, the boot and the
rear screen lock automatically.
Deactivation
Press button A again for more than
two seconds.
A confi rmation message appears on the
multifunction screen, accompanied by
an audible signal.
88
ACCESS
Emergency control
System which locks or unlocks the
doors mechanically in the event of a
malfunction of the battery or of the cen-
tral locking.
Insert the key in the lock, located on
the edge of the door, then turn it one
eighth of a turn .
Opening
After unlocking the vehicle com-
pletely using the remote control or
the key, pull the handle and raise
the tailgate.
BOOT
-
when the engine is running
,
this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by a message
on the multifunction screen
for a few seconds,
- when the vehicle is moving (speed
above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen for a few
seconds.
Tailgate release
System for mechanical unlocking of the
boot in the event of a battery or central
locking malfunction.
Unlocking
Fold back the rear seats to gain
access to the lock from inside the
boot.
Insert a small screwdriver into hole A
of the lock to unlock the tailgate.
Locking the driver's door
Insert the key in the lock, then turn it
to the right.
Unlocking the driver's door
Insert the key in the lock, then turn it
to the left.
Locking the front and rear
passenger doors
Unlocking the front and rear
passenger doors
Pull the interior door opening control.
Closing
Lower the tailgate using the interior
grab handle.
If the tailgate is not closed correctly:
88
ACCESS
Emergency control
System which locks or unlocks the
doors mechanically in the event of a
malfunction of the battery or of the cen-
tral locking.
Insert the key in the lock, located on
the edge of the door, then turn it one
eighth of a turn .
Opening
After unlocking the vehicle com-
pletely using the remote control or
the key, pull the handle and raise
the tailgate.
BOOT
-
when the engine is running
,
this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by a message
on the multifunction screen
for a few seconds,
- when the vehicle is moving (speed
above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen for a few
seconds.
Tailgate release
System for mechanical unlocking of the
boot in the event of a battery or central
locking malfunction.
Unlocking
Fold back the rear seats to gain
access to the lock from inside the
boot.
Insert a small screwdriver into hole A
of the lock to unlock the tailgate.
Locking the driver's door
Insert the key in the lock, then turn it
to the right.
Unlocking the driver's door
Insert the key in the lock, then turn it
to the left.
Locking the front and rear
passenger doors
Unlocking the front and rear
passenger doors
Pull the interior door opening control.
Closing
Lower the tailgate using the interior
grab handle.
If the tailgate is not closed correctly:
i
i
89
ACCESS
BOOT
Opening
After unlocking the vehicle com-
pletely using the remote control or
the key, with the rear screen closed,
pull on the handle A and raise the
tailgate.
Closing
Lower the tailgate using the interior
grab handle.
REAR SCREEN
Opening
With the boot closed, to unlock/
partially open the rear screen:
- either press control B ,
- or press the central button on the
remote control for more than two
seconds.
Raise the rear screen using the
base C of the wiper arm.
Closing
Lower the rear screen guiding it with
the wiper arm until it is closed.
If the rear screen is not closed correctly:
-
when the engine is running
,
this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by a message
on the multifunction screen
for a few seconds,
-
when the vehicle is moving (speed
above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message on the
multifunction screen for a few seconds.
-
when the engine is running
,
this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by a message
on the multifunction screen
for a few seconds,
-
when the vehicle is moving (speed
above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message on the
multifunction screen for a few seconds.
If the tailgate is not closed correctly:
The boot and the rear screen can-
not both be open at the same time.
If the rear screen is unlocked,
the central locking does not take
place.
!
i
90
ACCESS
PANORAMIC SUNROOF
Component which has a tinted glass pan-
oramic surface to increase the light and
visibility in the passenger compartment.
Fitted with an electric blind in several sec-
tions to improve temperature and noise
related comfort.
If the blind meets an obstacle dur-
ing operation, you must reverse the
movement of the blind. To do this,
press the control concerned.
When the driver operates the blind
control, he must ensure that no one
is preventing correct closing of the
blind.
The driver must ensure that pas-
sengers use the blind correctly.
Be aware of children when operat-
ing the blind.
- manual mode
Pull or press control A gently.
The blind stops when you release
the control.
- automatic mode
Pull or press control A fi rmly.
One press opens or closes the
blind completely.
Pressing the control again stops
the blind.
Safety anti-pinch
In automatic mode and at the end of
its travel, if the blind meets an obstacle
while closing it stops and moves back
slightly.
One-touch electric blind
There are two options for opening and
closing:
If the blind's supply is cut off, the
safety anti-pinch must be reini-
tialised:
press the control until the blind
is fully closed.
If the blind re-opens during the
closing manoeuvre, and immedi-
ately after it stops:
pull the control until the blind is
fully open,
press the control until the blind
is fully closed.
The safety anti-pinch function
is not operational during these
operations.
i
91
ACCESS
The key cannot be removed from
the lock until the cap is put back on
the tank.
Opening the cap may trigger an air
intake noise. This vacuum, which is
perfectly normal, is caused by the
sealing of the fuel system.
FUEL TANK
Capacity of the tank: approximately
60 litres.
To fi ll the tank safely:
it is essential that the engine is
switched off,
open the fuel fi ller fl ap,
insert the key in the cap, then turn it
to the left,
When fi lling is complete:
refi t the cap,
turn the key to the right, then remove
it from the cap,
close the fl ap.
remove the cap and secure it on the
hook, located on the inside of the
fl ap,
fi ll the tank, but do not continue
after the 3rd cut-off of the nozzle ;
this could cause malfunctions.
Low fuel level
Filling
A label affi xed to the inside of the fl ap
reminds you of the type of fuel to be
used according to your engine.
More than 5 litres of fuel must be add-
ed in order to be registered by the fuel
gauge.
Operating fault
A fuel gauge malfunction is indicated by
the return of the fuel gauge needle to
zero.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
When the fuel tank minimum
level is reached, this warning
lamp comes on on the instru-
ment panel, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen. When it fi rst
comes on, you have approximately
6 litres of fuel remaining.
Fill up as soon as possible to avoid run-
ning out of fuel.
If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer also
to the "Checks" section.
i
92
ACCESS
Quality of the fuel used for
petrol engines
The petrol engines are perfectly com-
patible with E10 type petrol biofuels
(containing 10 % ethanol), conforming
to European standards EN 228 and
EN 15376.
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 %
ethanol) are reserved exclusively for ve-
hicles marketed for the use of this type
of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of
the ethanol must comply with European
standard EN 15293.
For Brazil only, special vehicles are
marketed to run on fuels containing up
to 100 % ethanol (E100 type).
Quality of the fuel used for
Diesel engines
The Diesel engines are perfectly com-
patible with biofuels which conform to
current and future European standards
(Diesel fuel which complies with stan-
dard EN 590 mixed with a biofuel which
complies with standard EN 14214)
available at the pumps (containing up
to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
The B30 biofuel can be used in cer-
tain Diesel engines; however, this use
is subject to strict application of the
special servicing conditions. Consult a
PEUGEOT dealer.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or dilut-
ed, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited
(risk of damage to the engine and fuel
system).
Special features of BioFlex
engines
A BioFlex vehicle has been designed
to run on unleaded petrol (RON 95 or
RON 98) or ethanol (this is a mixture
containing 85 % ethanol and 15 % un-
leaded petrol, called E85).
So, regardless of the quantity of fuel re-
maining in your tank and irrespective of
its type (RON 95/RON 98, E85 or a mix-
ture of the two), you can fi ll your tank at
any time with unleaded petrol (RON 95
or RON 98) or ethanol (E85).
There is no problem driving on unlead-
ed petrol only with this vehicle.
In winter conditions, starting the
engine from cold may sometimes
prove diffi cult. During these very
cold periods you are advised to
use unleaded petrol rather than
E85 to ensure optimum starting
conditions.
93
VISIBILITY
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
CONTROLS
Control stalk for the selection and con-
trol of the various front and rear lamps
providing the vehicle's lighting.
Main lighting
The various front and rear lamps of the
vehicle are designed to adapt the driv-
er's visibility progressively in relation to
the climatic conditions:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see
without dazzling other drivers,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly
when the road is clear.
Additional lighting
Other lamps are fi tted to fulfi l the re-
quirements of particular driving condi-
tions:
- a rear foglamp to be seen from a
distance,
- front foglamps for even better
forward vision,
- directional headlamps for improved
visibility when cornering,
- daytime running lamps to be seen
during the day.
Programming
Various automatic lighting control
modes are also available depending on
options:
- guide-me-home lighting,
- automatic lighting,
- directional lighting.
Model without AUTO lighting
Model with AUTO lighting
Automatic illumination of
headlamps.
Manual controls
The lighting commands are issued di-
rectly by the driver by means of the
ring A and the stalk B .
A. Main lighting mode selection ring:
turn it to position the symbol required
facing the mark.
Lamps off.
Sidelamps only.
B. Stalk for switching headlamps: pull
to switch the lighting between dipped
headlamps/main beam headlamps.
In the lamps off and sidelamps modes,
the driver can switch on the main beam
headlamps temporarily ("headlamp
fl ash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.
Dipped headlamps or main
beam headlamps.
Displays
Lighting of the corresponding indicator
lamp on the instrument panel confi rms
the switching on of the lighting selected.
!
i
94
VISIBILITY
Model with rear foglamp only
rear foglamp
To switch on the foglamp, turn the
ring C forwards.
When the lighting is switched off au-
tomatically (with AUTO model), the fo-
glamp and the dipped headlamps will
remain on.
To switch off all of the lighting, turn
the ring C rearwards.
In good or rainy weather, both day
and night, the front foglamps and
the rear foglamp are prohibited. In
these situations, the power of their
beams may dazzle other drivers.
They should only be used in fog or
snow.
In these weather conditions, it is
your responsibility to switch on the
foglamps and dipped beam head-
lamps manually as the brightness
sensor may detect suffi cient light.
Do not forget to switch off the front
foglamps and the rear foglamp when
they are no longer necessary.
Switching off of the lamps when
the ignition is switched off
On switching off the ignition, all of
the lamps turn off immediately, ex-
cept for dipped beam if guide-me-
home lighting is activated.
Model with front foglamps and
a rear foglamp
Front and rear foglamps
Rotate and release the ring C :
forwards a fi rst time to switch on the
front foglamps.
forwards a second time to switch on
the rear foglamp,
rearwards a fi rst time to switch off
the rear foglamp
rearwards a second time to switch
of the front fog lamps.
When the lighting is switched off auto-
matically (with AUTO model) or when
the dipped headlamps are switched off
manually, the foglamps and sidelamps
will remain on.
Turn the ring rearwards to switch
off the foglamps, the sidelamps will
then switch off.
C. Foglamp selection ring.
The foglamps operate with the dipped
and main beam headlamps.
Switching on the lamps after the
ignition is switched off
To reactivate the lighting control,
rotate ring A to the "0" position -
lamps off, then to the desired posi-
tion.
On opening the driver's door a
temporary audible signal warns the
driver that the lighting is on.
The lamps, with the exception of
the sidelamps, switch off automati-
cally after a maximum duration of
thirty minutes to prevent discharg-
ing of the battery.
i
95
VISIBILITY
Manual guide-me-home lighting
Temporarily keeping the dipped beam
headlamps on after the vehicle's igni-
tion has been switched off makes the
driver's exit easier when the light is
poor.
Switching on
With the ignition off, "fl ash" the
headlamps using the lighting stalk.
A further "headlamp fl ash" switches
the function off.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting
switches off automatically after a set
time.
Daytime running lamps
Special daytime lighting, compulsory in
certain countries, which comes on au-
tomatically when the engine is started
so that the vehicle can be seen more
easily.
This function is provided by special
dedicated lamps.
The instruments and controls (instru-
ment panel, multifunction screen, air
conditioning control panel, ...) are not
lit, except on switching to the automatic
lighting mode or when the lighting is
switched on manually.
Programming
In countries in which this
function is not imposed by
regulations, you can acti-
vate or deactivate it via the
multifunction screen con-
fi guration menu.
In some climatic conditions (e.g.
low temperature or humidity), the
presence of misting on the internal
surface of the glass of the head-
lamps and rear lamps is normal;
it disappears after the lamps have
been on for a few minutes.
In countries in which it is imposed by
regulations:
- by default, this function is activated,
- the sidelamps and the number plate
lamps are also switched on.
Automatic illumination of headlamps
The sidelamps and dipped beam head-
lamps are switched on automatically,
without any action on the part of the
driver, when a low level of external light
is detected or in certain cases of activa-
tion of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a
suffi cient level or after the windscreen
wipers are switched off, the lamps are
switched off automatically.
Activation
Turn ring A to the "AUTO" position. The
automatic illumination of headlamps
is accompanied by a message on the
multifunction screen.
Deactivation
Turn ring A to a position other than
"AUTO" . Deactivation is accompanied
by a message on the multifunction
screen.
i
95
VISIBILITY
Manual guide-me-home lighting
Temporarily keeping the dipped beam
headlamps on after the vehicle's igni-
tion has been switched off makes the
driver's exit easier when the light is
poor.
Switching on
With the ignition off, "fl ash" the
headlamps using the lighting stalk.
A further "headlamp fl ash" switches
the function off.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting
switches off automatically after a set
time.
Daytime running lamps
Special daytime lighting, compulsory in
certain countries, which comes on au-
tomatically when the engine is started
so that the vehicle can be seen more
easily.
This function is provided by special
dedicated lamps.
The instruments and controls (instru-
ment panel, multifunction screen, air
conditioning control panel, ...) are not
lit, except on switching to the automatic
lighting mode or when the lighting is
switched on manually.
Programming
In countries in which this
function is not imposed by
regulations, you can acti-
vate or deactivate it via the
multifunction screen con-
fi guration menu.
In some climatic conditions (e.g.
low temperature or humidity), the
presence of misting on the internal
surface of the glass of the head-
lamps and rear lamps is normal;
it disappears after the lamps have
been on for a few minutes.
In countries in which it is imposed by
regulations:
- by default, this function is activated,
- the sidelamps and the number plate
lamps are also switched on.
Automatic illumination of headlamps
The sidelamps and dipped beam head-
lamps are switched on automatically,
without any action on the part of the
driver, when a low level of external light
is detected or in certain cases of activa-
tion of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a
suffi cient level or after the windscreen
wipers are switched off, the lamps are
switched off automatically.
Activation
Turn ring A to the "AUTO" position. The
automatic illumination of headlamps
is accompanied by a message on the
multifunction screen.
Deactivation
Turn ring A to a position other than
"AUTO" . Deactivation is accompanied
by a message on the multifunction
screen.
i
!
i
96
VISIBILITY
EXTERIOR WELCOME
LIGHTING
The remote switching on of the light-
ing makes your approach to the vehicle
easier in poor light. It is activated ac-
cording to the level of light detected by
the brightness sensor.
Switching on
Press the open padlock on the
remote control.
The dipped beam headlamps and
the sidelamps come on; your vehicle
is also unlocked.
Programming
The lighting duration is se-
lected via the multifunction
screen confi guration menu.
The duration of the welcome light-
ing is associated with and identical
to that of the automatic guide-me-
home lighting.
In fog or snow, the brightness
sensor may detect suffi cient light.
Therefore, the lighting will not come
on automatically.
Do not cover the brightness sensor,
coupled with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the wind-
screen behind the rear view mirror;
the associated functions would no
longer be controlled.
Coupling with the automatic "Guide-
me-home" lighting
Association with the automatic illumina-
tion of headlamps provides "guide-me-
home" lighting with the following addition-
al options:
- selection of the lighting duration to
15, 30 or 60 seconds in the vehicle
parameters on the multifunction
screen confi guration menu (except
in the case of the monochrome
screen A, for which the duration is
set: 60 seconds),
- automatic activation of "guide-me-
home" lighting when automatic
illumination of headlamps is in
operation.
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the bright-
ness sensor, the lighting come on,
this warning lamp is displayed on
the instrument panel and/or a mes-
sage appears on the multifunction screen,
accompanied by an audible signal.
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS
The initial setting is position "0" .
To avoid causing a nuisance to other
road users, the height of the halogen
headlamps should be adjusted in rela-
tion to the load in the vehicle.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised load.
Switching off
The exterior welcome lighting switches
off automatically after a set time, when
the ignition is switched on or on locking
the vehicle.
i
!
i
96
VISIBILITY
EXTERIOR WELCOME
LIGHTING
The remote switching on of the light-
ing makes your approach to the vehicle
easier in poor light. It is activated ac-
cording to the level of light detected by
the brightness sensor.
Switching on
Press the open padlock on the
remote control.
The dipped beam headlamps and
the sidelamps come on; your vehicle
is also unlocked.
Programming
The lighting duration is se-
lected via the multifunction
screen confi guration menu.
The duration of the welcome light-
ing is associated with and identical
to that of the automatic guide-me-
home lighting.
In fog or snow, the brightness
sensor may detect suffi cient light.
Therefore, the lighting will not come
on automatically.
Do not cover the brightness sensor,
coupled with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the wind-
screen behind the rear view mirror;
the associated functions would no
longer be controlled.
Coupling with the automatic "Guide-
me-home" lighting
Association with the automatic illumina-
tion of headlamps provides "guide-me-
home" lighting with the following addition-
al options:
- selection of the lighting duration to
15, 30 or 60 seconds in the vehicle
parameters on the multifunction
screen confi guration menu (except
in the case of the monochrome
screen A, for which the duration is
set: 60 seconds),
- automatic activation of "guide-me-
home" lighting when automatic
illumination of headlamps is in
operation.
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the bright-
ness sensor, the lighting come on,
this warning lamp is displayed on
the instrument panel and/or a mes-
sage appears on the multifunction screen,
accompanied by an audible signal.
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS
The initial setting is position "0" .
To avoid causing a nuisance to other
road users, the height of the halogen
headlamps should be adjusted in rela-
tion to the load in the vehicle.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised load.
Switching off
The exterior welcome lighting switches
off automatically after a set time, when
the ignition is switched on or on locking
the vehicle.
i
!
i
96
VISIBILITY
EXTERIOR WELCOME
LIGHTING
The remote switching on of the light-
ing makes your approach to the vehicle
easier in poor light. It is activated ac-
cording to the level of light detected by
the brightness sensor.
Switching on
Press the open padlock on the
remote control.
The dipped beam headlamps and
the sidelamps come on; your vehicle
is also unlocked.
Programming
The lighting duration is se-
lected via the multifunction
screen confi guration menu.
The duration of the welcome light-
ing is associated with and identical
to that of the automatic guide-me-
home lighting.
In fog or snow, the brightness
sensor may detect suffi cient light.
Therefore, the lighting will not come
on automatically.
Do not cover the brightness sensor,
coupled with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the wind-
screen behind the rear view mirror;
the associated functions would no
longer be controlled.
Coupling with the automatic "Guide-
me-home" lighting
Association with the automatic illumina-
tion of headlamps provides "guide-me-
home" lighting with the following addition-
al options:
- selection of the lighting duration to
15, 30 or 60 seconds in the vehicle
parameters on the multifunction
screen confi guration menu (except
in the case of the monochrome
screen A, for which the duration is
set: 60 seconds),
- automatic activation of "guide-me-
home" lighting when automatic
illumination of headlamps is in
operation.
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the bright-
ness sensor, the lighting come on,
this warning lamp is displayed on
the instrument panel and/or a mes-
sage appears on the multifunction screen,
accompanied by an audible signal.
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS
The initial setting is position "0" .
To avoid causing a nuisance to other
road users, the height of the halogen
headlamps should be adjusted in rela-
tion to the load in the vehicle.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised load.
Switching off
The exterior welcome lighting switches
off automatically after a set time, when
the ignition is switched on or on locking
the vehicle.
!
i
97
VISIBILITY
DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING
When the dipped or main beam head-
lamps are on, this function enables the
light beams to provide improved lighting
of the side of the road when cornering.
The use of this function, from approxi-
mately 12 mph (20 km/h) and associ-
ated with the xenon headlamps only,
considerably improves the quality of
your lighting when cornering.
with directional lighting
without directional lighting
Programming
Operating fault
The function is activated or
deactivated via the multi-
function screen confi gura-
tion menu.
If a malfunction occurs, this warn-
ing lamp fl ashes on the instrument
panel, accompanied by a mes-
sage on the multifunction screen.
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF
THE XENON HEADLAMPS
Do not touch the xenon headlamp
bulbs. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
In order to avoid causing a nuisance to
other road users, this system corrects
the height of the xenon headlamp beams
automatically and when stationary, in re
la-
tion to the load in the vehicle.
If a malfunction occurs, this
warning lamp and/or the ser-
vice warning lamp is displayed
on the instrument panel, ac-
companied by an audible signal and a
message on the multifunction screen.
The system then places your headlamps
in the lowest position.
When stationary or moving at very
low speed or when reverse gear is
engaged, the function is inactive.
The status of the function remains
in the memory when the ignition is
switched off.
!
i
97
VISIBILITY
DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING
When the dipped or main beam head-
lamps are on, this function enables the
light beams to provide improved lighting
of the side of the road when cornering.
The use of this function, from approxi-
mately 12 mph (20 km/h) and associ-
ated with the xenon headlamps only,
considerably improves the quality of
your lighting when cornering.
with directional lighting
without directional lighting
Programming
Operating fault
The function is activated or
deactivated via the multi-
function screen confi gura-
tion menu.
If a malfunction occurs, this warn-
ing lamp fl ashes on the instrument
panel, accompanied by a mes-
sage on the multifunction screen.
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF
THE XENON HEADLAMPS
Do not touch the xenon headlamp
bulbs. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
In order to avoid causing a nuisance to
other road users, this system corrects
the height of the xenon headlamp beams
automatically and when stationary, in re
la-
tion to the load in the vehicle.
If a malfunction occurs, this
warning lamp and/or the ser-
vice warning lamp is displayed
on the instrument panel, ac-
companied by an audible signal and a
message on the multifunction screen.
The system then places your headlamps
in the lowest position.
When stationary or moving at very
low speed or when reverse gear is
engaged, the function is inactive.
The status of the function remains
in the memory when the ignition is
switched off.
98
VISIBILITY
WIPER CONTROLS
System for selection and control of the
various front and rear wiping modes for
the elimination of rain and cleaning.
The vehicle's front and rear wipers are
designed to improve the driver's visibility
progressively according to the climatic
conditions.
Manual controls
The wiper commands are issued directly
by the driver by means of the stalk A
and the ring B .
Model with intermittent wiping
Model with AUTO wiping
fast (heavy rain),
normal (moderate rain),
intermittent (proportional to
the speed of the vehicle),
automatic, then single
wipe (see following page).
park,
single wipe (press downwards)
,
Programming
Various automatic wiper control modes
are also available according to the fol-
lowing options:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen
wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse
gear.
Windscreen wipers
A. wiping speed selection stalk:
or
!
99
VISIBILITY
Windscreen and headlamp wash
B. rear wiper selection ring:
park,
intermittent wipe,
wash-wipe (set duration).
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the
rear wiper will come into operation if the
windscreen wipers are operating.
Pull the windscreen wiper stalk
towards you. The windscreen wash
then the windscreen wipers operate
for a fi xed period.
If the dipped headlamps are on, the
headlamp washers operate at the same
time.
Rear wiper
If a signifi cant accumulation of
snow or ice is present, or when us-
ing a tailgate bicycle carrier, deac-
tivate the automatic rear wiper via
the multifunction screen confi gura-
tion menu.
Programming
The function is activated or
deactivated via the multi-
function screen confi gura-
tion menu.
This function is activated
by default.
Screenwash/headlamp wash low
In the case of vehicles fi tted with
headlamp washers, when the
minimum level of the reservoir is
reached, this warning lamp and/
or the service warning lamp is displayed
on the instrument panel, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message on the
multifunction screen.
Next time you stop, fi ll the screenwash/
headlamp wash reservoir.
The warning lamp is displayed when the ig
ni-
tion is switched on, or every time the stalk
is operated, until the reservoir is fi lled.
!
i
i
100
VISIBILITY
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate auto-
matically, without any action on the part
of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor
behind the rear view mirror), adapting
their speed to the intensity of the rain-
fall.
Activation
This is controlled manually by the driver
by pushing the stalk downwards to the
"AUTO" position.
It is accompanied by a message on the
multifunction screen.
This position permits release of the
windscreen wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement
of the blades. It can also be useful, in
winter, to detach the blades from the
windscreen.
In the moment following switching off of
the ignition, any action on the stalk posi-
tions the wipers vertically on the wind-
screen.
To park the wipers after this has been
done, switch on the ignition and operate
the stalk.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked
with the brightness sensor and lo-
cated in the centre of the wind-
screen behind the rear view mirror.
Switch off the automatic rain sen-
sitive wipers when using an auto-
matic car wash.
In winter, to avoid damaging the
wiper blades, it is advisable to wait
until the windscreen is completely
clear of ice before activating the
automatic rain sensitive wipers.
The automatic rain sensitive wip-
ers must be reactivated if the igni-
tion has been off for more than one
minute, by pushing the stalk down-
wards.
Switching off
This is controlled manually by the driver
by moving the stalk upwards then re-
turning it to position "0" .
It is accompanied by a message on the
multifunction screen.
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction oc-
curs, the wipers will operate in intermit-
tent mode.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
For maintain the effectiveness of
the "fl at-blade" wiper blades, it is
advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using
soapy water,
- avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen.
- replace them at the fi rst signs of
wear.
!
i
i
100
VISIBILITY
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate auto-
matically, without any action on the part
of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor
behind the rear view mirror), adapting
their speed to the intensity of the rain-
fall.
Activation
This is controlled manually by the driver
by pushing the stalk downwards to the
"AUTO" position.
It is accompanied by a message on the
multifunction screen.
This position permits release of the
windscreen wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement
of the blades. It can also be useful, in
winter, to detach the blades from the
windscreen.
In the moment following switching off of
the ignition, any action on the stalk posi-
tions the wipers vertically on the wind-
screen.
To park the wipers after this has been
done, switch on the ignition and operate
the stalk.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked
with the brightness sensor and lo-
cated in the centre of the wind-
screen behind the rear view mirror.
Switch off the automatic rain sen-
sitive wipers when using an auto-
matic car wash.
In winter, to avoid damaging the
wiper blades, it is advisable to wait
until the windscreen is completely
clear of ice before activating the
automatic rain sensitive wipers.
The automatic rain sensitive wip-
ers must be reactivated if the igni-
tion has been off for more than one
minute, by pushing the stalk down-
wards.
Switching off
This is controlled manually by the driver
by moving the stalk upwards then re-
turning it to position "0" .
It is accompanied by a message on the
multifunction screen.
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction oc-
curs, the wipers will operate in intermit-
tent mode.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
For maintain the effectiveness of
the "fl at-blade" wiper blades, it is
advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using
soapy water,
- avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen.
- replace them at the fi rst signs of
wear.
i
i
!
101
VISIBILITY
COURTESY LAMPS
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
3. Rear side reading lamps
4. Rear courtesy lamp
Front and rear courtesy lamps
In this position, the courtesy
lamp comes on gradually:
Map reading lamps
With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
With the "permanent lighting" mode,
the duration of lighting varies de-
pending on the context:
- with the ignition off, approximately
ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
-
with the engine running, unlimited.
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the key is removed from the
ignition,
- when a door is opened,
-
when the remote control locking button is
activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
When the front courtesy lamp is in
the "permanent lighting" position,
the rear courtesy lamp will also
come on, unless it is in the "perma-
nently off" position.
To switch off the rear courtesy
lamp, place it in the "permanently
off" position.
Rear side reading
lamps
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is
closed.
Take care not to place anything in
contact with the courtesy lamps.
With the ignition on, the fi rst press
of the reading lamp switch switches
on the reading lamp in "permanent
lighting" mode.
Following a second press, it comes
on:
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the key is removed from the
ignition,
- when a door is opened,
- when the remote control locking
button is pressed, in order to
locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
-
30 seconds after the last door is closed.
i
i
102
VISIBILITY
INTERIOR MOOD LIGHTING
The dimmed passenger compartment
lighting improves visibility in the vehicle
when the light is poor.
Different lighting times are avail-
able:
- when the ignition is off,
approximately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
- when the engine is running, no
limit.
This comes on automatically when the
boot is opened and switches off auto-
matically when the boot is closed.
INTERIOR WELCOME LIGHTING
The remote switching on of the passen-
ger compartment lighting makes your
entry into the vehicle easier in poor
light. It is activated in accordance with
the light intensity detected by the bright-
ness sensor.
BOOT LAMP
Switching on
Press the open padlock on the
remote control.
The front door sill lighting, the footwell
lighting and the courtesy lamps come
on; your vehicle is also unlocked.
Switching off
The interior welcome lighting switch-
es off automatically after a set time or
when one of the doors is opened.
Programming
Switching on
At night, the footwell lighting and the
front courtesy mood lamp come on
automatically when the sidelamps are
switched on.
Switching off
The interior mood lighting switches off
automatically when the sidelamps are
switched off.
Programming
The welcome lighting duration is
associated with and identical to
that of the automatic guide-me-
home lighting.
The function is activated or
deactivated via the multi-
function screen confi gura-
tion menu.
This function is activated
by default.
The lighting duration is
selected via the multifunc-
tion screen confi guration
menu.
103
FITTINGS
INTERIOR FITTINGS
1. Spectacles storage
2. Sun visor
(see details on following page)
3. Grab handle with coat hook
4. Toll card/car park ticket windows
(see details on following page)
5. Storage compartment
6. Oddments box
7. Bag hook
8. Illuminated glove box
(see details on following page)
9. Door trays
10. Illuminated ashtray
(see details on following page)
11. Storage compartment
with non-slip carpet
12. 12 V accessories socket
(see details on following page)
13. Cup holder
14. Front armrest
(see details on following page)
15. Storage box
i
104
FITTINGS
ILLUMINATED GLOVE BOX
This has areas for storing a bottle of water,
the vehicle's handbook pack...
Its lid has areas for storing a pen, a pair of
spectacles, tokens, cards, a can...
SUN VISOR
Component which protects against sunlight
from the front or the side, also equipped
with an illuminated courtesy mirror.
With the ignition on, raise the
concealing fl ap; the mirror is lit
automatically.
This sun visor is also equipped with a
ticket holder.
TOLL CARD/CAR PARK TICKET
WINDOWS
Facility for affi xing toll cards and/or car
park tickets.
These windows are located on each
side of the base of the rear view mirror.
They are two non-refl ective areas of the
athermic windscreen.
The athermic windscreen limits
heating of the passenger compart-
ment by reducing the effects of the
sun's rays (ultra-violet). It consists
of a refl ective layer, which also
blocks certain radio-electric signals
(toll card payments, ...).
To open the glove box, raise the
handle.
The lamp comes on when the lid is
opened.
If your vehicle is fi tted with air condition-
ing, the glove box has an air vent A ,
which can be opened or closed. This
distributes the same conditioned air as
the vents in the passenger compart-
ment.
105
FITTINGS
12 V ACCESSORIES SOCKET
To connect a 12 V accessory (max
power: 120 Watts), remove the cover
and connect a suitable adaptor.
ILLUMINATED ASHTRAY
Pull the drawer for access to the
ashtray.
To empty the ashtray, after opening,
press the tab and remove the
ashtray.
BAG HOOK
Press the lower part of the hook to
unfold it.
Hang the strap of your bag on the
hook to secure it.
USB PLUG - READER
This connection box, consisting of a USB
port, is located in the front armrest.
It permits the connection of portable
equipment, such as an iPod
®
digital au-
dio player of generation 5 or later or a
USB stick.
It reads the audio fi le formats (mp3,
ogg, wma, wav...) which are transmitted
to your audio equipment and played via
the vehicle's speakers.
You can manage these fi les using the
steering wheel controls or the audio
equipment control panel and display
them on the multifunction screen.
When it is in use, the portable equipment
charges automatically.
For more information on the use of this
equipment, refer to the "PC Com 3D" or
"PC Sound" part of the "Audio and Tele-
matics" section.
106
FITTINGS
FRONT ARMREST
Comfort and storage device for the driver
and front passenger.
The height and length of the armrest
cover can be adjusted for greater com-
fort.
Height adjustment
Raise the cover to the required
position (low, intermediate or high).
If you raise the cover slightly beyond
the high position, guide it when
lowering it to the low position.
STORAGE BOX
Storage area, built into the rear of the
front armrest, for the rear passengers.
To empty the box, after opening,
press the tab and remove it.
Storage
The armrest's compartment can hold up
to 6 CDs.
Raise the lever 1 .
Raise the cover fully.
Longitudinal adjustment
Slide the cover fully forwards or
rearwards.
105
FITTINGS
12 V ACCESSORIES SOCKET
To connect a 12 V accessory (max
power: 120 Watts), remove the cover
and connect a suitable adaptor.
ILLUMINATED ASHTRAY
Pull the drawer for access to the
ashtray.
To empty the ashtray, after opening,
press the tab and remove the
ashtray.
BAG HOOK
Press the lower part of the hook to
unfold it.
Hang the strap of your bag on the
hook to secure it.
USB PLUG - READER
This connection box, consisting of a USB
port, is located in the front armrest.
It permits the connection of portable
equipment, such as an iPod
®
digital au-
dio player of generation 5 or later or a
USB stick.
It reads the audio fi le formats (mp3,
ogg, wma, wav...) which are transmitted
to your audio equipment and played via
the vehicle's speakers.
You can manage these fi les using the
steering wheel controls or the audio
equipment control panel and display
them on the multifunction screen.
When it is in use, the portable equipment
charges automatically.
For more information on the use of this
equipment, refer to the "PC Com 3D" or
"PC Sound" part of the "Audio and Tele-
matics" section.
!
!
107
FITTINGS
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- only use mats which are suited
to the fi xings already present
in the vehicle; their use is
essential,
- never fi t one mat on top of
another.
MATS
Removable carpet protection compo-
nent.
Refitting
To refi t the mat on the driver's side:
position the mat correctly,
refi t the fi xings by pressing,
check that the mat is secured
correctly.
Fitting
When fi tting the mat for the fi rst time,
on the driver's side, use only the fi xings
provided in the wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on
the carpet.
Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
move the seat as far back as
possible,
unclip the fi xings,
remove the mat.
STORAGE DRAWER
Opening
Raise the front of the drawer and pull it.
Do not place heavy objects in the
drawer.
Removal
Bring the drawer to the end of its
travel.
Press the ends of the slides.
Raise the drawer and pull it fully.
Refitting
Engage the drawer in its slides.
At the end of its travel, press on the
top of the drawer to secure it.
The storage drawer is located under the
front passenger's seat.
!
108
FITTINGS
REAR ARMREST
SKI FLAP
Opening
Lower the rear armrest.
Pull the fl ap handle downwards.
Lower the fl ap.
Load the objects from inside the
boot.
Lower the rear armrest for a more
comfortable position.
Raise the cover to gain access to its
storage compartment.
This has a storage tray, two cup holders
and two pen holders.
"AIRCRAFT" TYPE
TABLES
To use the table, raise it fully until it
locks in the high position.
To store the table, lower it, passing
the point of resistance, to the low
position.
On the passenger side, do not for-
get to fold the "aircraft" type table
before placing the seat in the table
position.
Do not place hard or heavy objects
on the table. They could become
dangerous projectiles in the event
of emergency braking or impact.
Comfort and storage device for the rear
passengers.
Device for storing and transporting long
objects.
Installed on the back of each front seat,
these allow you to set down objects and
each is equipped with a cup holder.
109
FITTINGS
BOOT LAYOUT
1. Rear parcel shelf
(see details on following page)
2. Hooks
(see details on following page)
3. Stowing rings
4. Luggage retaining strap
5. Enclosed storage tray
6. Open storage tray
7. Storage box
(see details on following page)
i
110
FITTINGS
To remove the shelf:
unhook the two cords,
raise the shelf slightly, then remove it.
Rear parcel shelf
When changing a wheel
An additional hook, under the shelf,
permits easy access to the spare
wheel by retaining the boot carpet
by means of its cord.
The hooks permit the securing of shop-
ping bags.
Hooks
There are several options for storing the
shelf:
- either upright behind the front
seats,
- or fl at at the base of the boot.
Raise the boot carpet to gain access
to the storage box.
This has areas for storing a box of spare
bulbs, a fi rst aid kit, a temporary tyre re-
pair kit, two warning triangles...
Storage box
111
FITTINGS
BOOT FITTINGS
1. Rear parcel shelf
(see details on following page)
2. 12 V accessories socket
(see details on following page)
3. Hooks
(see details on following page)
4. Stowing rings
5. Storage tray
6. High load retaining net
(see details on following page)
7. Luggage retaining strap
i
112
FITTINGS
Rear parcel shelf
This consists of four sections three of
which can be folded back on each other.
There are several options for storing the
load space cover:
- either folded back on itself near the
rear seats (1),
- or folded back on itself and stored
in a location provided under the rear
seats (2).
To fold it from the boot:
unclip the load space cover from its
side supports,
take hold of the load space cover by
its handle A ,
fold it concertina-style to the rear
seats.
To unfold it from the boot:
take hold of the load space cover by
its handle A ,
unfold it to the boot pillars,
clip the load space cover on its side
supports.
Hooks
Maximum loads
7.5 kg, rear parcel shelf unfold-
ed with high load retaining net at
row 2.
The hooks can be used to hold shop-
ping bags.
i
i
113
FITTINGS
High load retaining net
Hooked onto the special upper and low-
er fi xings, this permits use of the entire
loading volume up to the roof:
- behind the rear seats (row 2),
- behind the front seats (row 1) when
the rear seats are folded.
To use it in row 1:
open the covers of the upper fi xings 1 ,
unroll the high load retaining net,
position one of the ends of the net's
metal bar in the corresponding upper
fi xing 1 , then do the same with the
other end,
slacken the straps fully,
fi x the snap hook of each of the
straps on the corresponding bar 3 ,
located under the cushion of the
rear seats,
fold the rear seats,
tighten the straps,
check that the net is hooked and
tightened correctly.
To use it in row 2:
fold or remove the load space cover,
open the covers of the upper fi xings 2 ,
unroll the high load retaining net,
position one of the ends of the net's
metal bar in the corresponding upper
fi xing 2 , then do the same with the
other end,
fi x the snap hook of each of the
straps in the corresponding ring 4 ,
located on the rear seats mechanism
support,
tighten the straps,
check that the net is hooked and
tightened correctly.
When positioning the net, check
that the strap loops are visible from
the boot; this will make slackening
or tightening easier.
This net can be stored in the storage
tray on the fl oor.
FITTINGS
BOOT FITTINGS
1. Load space screen
(see details on following page)
2. Storage box
3. 12 V accessories socket
(see details on following page)
4. Hooks
(see details on following page)
5. Stowing rings
6. High load retaining net
(see details on following page)
7. Rear armrests with can holder
8. Luggage retaining strap
9. Location for torch or for Hi-Fi
amplifi er
(see details on following page)
i
115
FITTINGS
Load space screen
To install the load space screen:
position one of the ends of the roller
in its support,
insert the second end in its support;
the catch locks automatically,
unroll the load space screen to the
boot pillars,
insert the load space screen guides
in the rails on the boot pillars.
To store the load space screen, place it
at the boot sill, roller uppermost and fl ap
facing inwards.
To remove the load space screen:
remove the load space screen
guides from the rails on the boot
pillars,
roll up the load space screen in its
roller,
pull and support the catch at one of
the ends of the roller to release it,
remove the roller from its support
from the released end, then from the
second.
You can access the boot by open-
ing the rear screen and raising the
load space screen fl ap.
i
116
FITTINGS
High load retaining net
Hooked onto the special upper and lower
fi xings, this permits use of the entire load-
ing volume up to the roof behind the seats
of the 2nd row.
12 V accessories socket
In order to connect a 12 V accessory
(max power: 120 Watts), remove
the cap and connect the appropriate
adaptor.
Turn the key to the ignition position.
To use the net in the 2nd row (additional
seats folded or removed):
roll up or remove the load space
screen,
open the covers of the upper fi xings 1 ,
unroll the high load retaining net,
position one of the ends of the net's
metal bar in the corresponding upper
fi xing 1 , then do the same with the
other end,
attach the snap hook of each of the
net's straps in the corresponding
ring 2 , located on the lower fi xing of
the rear side seat belt,
tighten the straps,
check that the net is hooked and
tightened correctly.
Hooks
The hooks permit the securing of shop-
ping bags.
When positioning the net, check
that the strap loops are visible from
the boot; this will make slackening
or tightening easier.
! i
117
FITTINGS
Torch
This is a removable light, incorporated
in the boot wall, which can be used to
light the boot or as a torch.
For the boot lighting function, refer to
the "Visibility - § Boot lighting" section.
Operation
This torch operates with NiMH type ac-
cumulators.
It has an operating autonomy of approxi-
mately 45 minutes and charges while
you are driving.
Use
Extract the torch from its location
pulling it upwards.
Press the switch, located on the
back, to switch the torch on or off.
Unfold the support, located on the
back, to set down and raise the
torch; for example, when changing
a wheel.
Storing
Put the torch back in place in its
location starting with the lower part.
If you have forgotten to switch
off the torch, this switches it off
automatically.
Side blinds
Fitted on the rear windows of the 2nd
row, these protect your young children
from the sun.
Pull the blind by the central tab.
Position the blind attachments on
the corresponding hooks.
Observe the polarities when fi tting
the accumulators.
Never replace the accumulators
with batteries.
It the torch is not engaged correctly,
it may not charge and may not come
on when the boot is opened.
i
118
CHILD SAFETY
PEUGEOT recommends that chil-
dren should travel in the rear seats
of your vehicle:
- "rearwards-facing" up to the
age of 2,
- "forwards-facing" over the
age of 2.
TO CHILD SEATS
CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
"Forwards-facing"
When a "forwards-facing" child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat ,
adjust the vehicle's seat to the interme-
diate longitudinal position with the seat
back upright and leave the passenger
airbag activated.
"Rearwards-facing"
When a "rearwards-facing" child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat ,
it is essential that the passenger airbag
is deactivated. Otherwise, the child
would risk being seriously injured or
killed if the airbag were to infl ate.
* The rules for carrying children are
specifi c to each country. Refer to the
current legislation in your country.
Although one of PEUGEOT's main cri-
teria when designing your vehicle, the
safety of your children also depends on
you.
For maximum safety, please observe
the following recommendations:
- in accordance with European
regulations, all children under the
age of 12 or less than one and
a half metres tall must travel in
approved child seats suited to
their weight , on seats fi tted with a
seat belt or ISOFIX mountings * ,
- statistically, the safest seats in
your vehicle for carrying children
are the rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg
must travel in the "rearwards-
facing" position both in the front
and in the rear.
Intermediate longitudinal
position
119
CHILD SAFETY
Group 0: from birth to 10 kg
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg
L1
"RÖMER Baby-
Safe Plus"
Installed in the
rearwards-facing
position.
L2
"KIDDY Life"
The use of the
restraining cushion
is compulsory for
carrying young
children
(from 9 to 18 kg).
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L3
"RECARO Start''
L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From the age
of 6 years
(approximately 22 kg),
the booster is used
on its own.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fi tted to the vehicle's ISOFIX anchorages.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Passenger air bag OFF
CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured
using a three point seat belt :
119
CHILD SAFETY
Group 0: from birth to 10 kg
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg
L1
"RÖMER Baby-
Safe Plus"
Installed in the
rearwards-facing
position.
L2
"KIDDY Life"
The use of the
restraining cushion
is compulsory for
carrying young
children
(from 9 to 18 kg).
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L3
"RECARO Start''
L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From the age
of 6 years
(approximately 22 kg),
the booster is used
on its own.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fi tted to the vehicle's ISOFIX anchorages.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Passenger air bag OFF
CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured
using a three point seat belt :
120
CHILD SAFETY
LOCATION OF CHILD SEATS SECURED USING THE SEAT BELT
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using
the seat belt and universally approved (a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
(c) Consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
U : seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and universally approved "rear facing" and/or
"forward facing".
U(R1) : identical to U , with the vehicle's seat adjusted to the intermediate longitudinal position.
U(R2) : identical to U , with the vehicle's seat adjusted to the highest position and moved back fully.
* The seat's head restraint must be removed and stored.
Seat
Weight of the child/ indicative age
Less than 13 kg
(groups 0 (b)
and 0+)
Up to ≈ 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
From 1 to ≈ 3 years
From 15 to 25 kg
(group 2)
From 3 to ≈ 6 years
From 22 to 36 kg
(group 3)
From 6 to ≈ 10 years
Front passenger seat (c)
- fi xed U(R1) U(R1) U(R1) U(R1)
- height adjustable U(R2) U(R2) U(R2) U(R2)
Rear outer seats U U * U * U *
Rear centre seat U U * U * U *
121
CHILD SAFETY
LOCATION OF CHILD SEATS SECURED USING THE SEAT BELT
In accordance with the European regulation, this table indicates the options for the installation of child seats se-
cured using the seat belt and universally approved (a) depending on the weight of the child and the seat in the
vehicle.
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which
can be installed in all vehicles using
the seat belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant
car seats and "car cots" cannot be
installed on the front passenger
seat.
Seat
Weight of the child /indicative age
Below 13 kg
(groups 0 (b)
and 0+)
Up to ≈ 1 year
9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
From 1 to ≈ 3 years
15 to 25 kg
(group 2)
From 3 to ≈ 6 years
22 to 36 kg
(group 3)
From 6 to ≈ 10 years
1st
row
Front passenger seat (c)
- fi xed U(R1) U(R1) U(R1) U(R1)
- height adjustable U(R2) U(R2) U(R2) U(R2)
2nd
row
Outer
Seat in standard position
and moved inwards
U U U U
Centre
Centre seat
U U U U
3rd
row
Outer
Additional seat
U U U U
Outer
2nd row seat
U U U U
(c) Consult the current legislation in
your country before installing your
child on this seat.
U : seat suitable for the installation of a
child seat secured using the seat belt
and universally approved, "rear fac-
ing" and/or "forwards facing".
U(R1) : identical to U , with the vehicle's
seat adjusted to the intermediate
longitudinal position.
U(R2) : identical to U , with the vehicle's
seat adjusted to its highest posi-
tion and moved back fully.
!
122
CHILD SAFETY
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must
be positioned on the child's shoulder
without touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat
belt passes correctly over the child's
thighs.
PEUGEOT recommends the use of
a booster seat which has a back, fi t-
ted with a seat belt guide at shoulder
level.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- a child or children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle
which is exposed to the sun, with
the windows closed,
- the keys within reach of children
inside the vehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the
doors and rear windows, use the
"Child lock".
Take care not to open the rear win-
dows by more than one third.
To protect young children from the
rays of the sun, fi t side blinds on the
rear windows.
The incorrect installation of a child
seat in a vehicle compromises the
child's protection in the event of an
accident.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or
the child seat harnesses keeping the
slack relative to the child's body to a
minimum, even for short journeys.
When installing a child seat using the
seat belt, ensure that the seat belt is
tightened correctly on the child seat
and that it secures the child seat fi rmly
on the seat of your vehicle.
For optimum installation of the "for-
wards-facing" child seat, ensure that
the back of the child seat is in contact
with the back of the vehicle's seat and
that the head restraint does not cause
any discomfort.
If the head restraint has to be removed,
ensure that it is stored or attached se-
curely to prevent it from being thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp
braking.
Children under the age of 10 must not
travel in the "forwards-facing" position
on the front passenger seat, unless
the rear seats are already occupied
by other children, cannot be used or
are absent.
Deactivate the passenger airbag
when a "rearwards-facing" child seat
is installed on the front seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were to infl ate.
123
CHILD SAFETY
"ISOFIX" MOUNTINGS
Your vehicle has been approved in accor-
dance with the new ISOFIX regulation .
The seats, represented below, are fi tted
with regulation ISOFIX mountings:
Rear seats
The Isofi x mountings are three rings for
each seat:
- two rings A , located between the
vehicle seat back and cushion,
indicated by a label,
- a ring B , located behind the seat,
referred to as the TOP TETHER for
fi xing the upper strap.
Rear seats
Rear seats of the
2nd row
i
!
i
124
CHILD SAFETY
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fi tted with ISOFIX
mountings. In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the
three point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fi tting the child seat given in the seat manu-
facturer's installation guide.
ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY PEUGEOT AND
APPROVED FOR YOUR VEHICLE
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1 )
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed in the forwards-facing position.
Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the
upper ring B , referred to as the TOP TETHER.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
This ISOFIX mounting system guaran-
tees you fast, reliable and safe fi tting of
the child seat in your vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fi tted with
two locks which are secured easily on
the two rings A .
Some also have an upper strap which
is attached to ring B .
To attach this strap, raise the vehicle
seat's head restraint then pass the hook
between its rods. Then fi x the hook on
ring B and tighten the upper strap.
The incorrect installation of a child
seat in a vehicle compromises the
child's protection in the event of an
accident.
For information regarding the ISOFIX
child seats which can be installed in
your vehicle, consult the summary
table for the location of the ISOFIX
child seats.
i
!
i
124
CHILD SAFETY
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fi tted with ISOFIX
mountings. In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the
three point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fi tting the child seat given in the seat manu-
facturer's installation guide.
ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY PEUGEOT AND
APPROVED FOR YOUR VEHICLE
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1 )
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed in the forwards-facing position.
Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the
upper ring B , referred to as the TOP TETHER.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
This ISOFIX mounting system guaran-
tees you fast, reliable and safe fi tting of
the child seat in your vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fi tted with
two locks which are secured easily on
the two rings A .
Some also have an upper strap which
is attached to ring B .
To attach this strap, raise the vehicle
seat's head restraint then pass the hook
between its rods. Then fi x the hook on
ring B and tighten the upper strap.
The incorrect installation of a child
seat in a vehicle compromises the
child's protection in the event of an
accident.
For information regarding the ISOFIX
child seats which can be installed in
your vehicle, consult the summary
table for the location of the ISOFIX
child seats.
125
CHILD SAFETY
LOCATIONS FOR ISOFIX CHILD SEATS
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on
seats in the vehicle fi tted with ISOFIX mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter
from A to G , is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an I sofi x U niversal seat, " F orward facing" secured using the upper strap.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an I sofi x S emi- U niversal seat either:
- "rear facing" fi tted with an upper strap or a stay,
- "forward facing" fi tted with a stay,
- an infant car seat fi tted with an upper strap or a stay.
For advice on securing of the upper strap, refer to the paragraph "ISOFIX mountings".
* Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
** The ISOFIX infant car seat, secured on the lower rings of a vehicle ISOFIX seat, occupies two rear seats.
Weight of the child /indicative age
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to approx.
6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat * "rear facing" "rear facing" "forward facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
ISOFIX child seats universal
and semi-universal which
can be installed on the rear
outer seats
IL-SU ** IL-SU IL-SU
IUF
IL-SU
126
CHILD SAFETY
LOCATIONS FOR ISOFIX CHILD SEATS
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on
seats in the vehicle fi tted with ISOFIX mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G ,
is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an I sofi x U niversal seat, " F orward facing" secured using the upper strap.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an I sofi x S emi- U niversal seat either:
- "rear facing" fi tted with an upper strap or a stay,
- "forward facing" fi tted with a stay,
- an infant car seat fi tted with an upper strap or a stay.
For advice on securing of the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" paragraph.
X: seat not suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX seat of the size category indicated.
Weight of the child /indicative age
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to approx.
6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat * "rear facing" "rear facing" "forward facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Rear ISOFIX
seats; 2nd row
seat
Side IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU
IUF
IL-SU
Centre X IL-SU IL-SU
IUF
IL-SU
Outer, moved
inwards
X IL-SU IL-SU
IUF
IL-SU
Rear ISOFIX
seats; 2nd row
seat installed
in the 3rd row
Outer X X X
IUF
IL-SU
* Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
!
!
127
CHILD SAFETY
This system is independent and in no
circumstances does it take the place
of the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock each
time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the igni-
tion when leaving the vehicle, even for
a short time.
In the event of a serious impact, the
electric child lock is deactivated auto-
matically to permit the exit of the rear
passengers.
MANUAL CHILD LOCK
Mechanical system to prevent opening
of the rear door using its interior control.
The control is located on the edge of
each rear door.
Turn the red control one quarter of
a turn to the left using the ignition
key.
ELECTRIC CHILD LOCK
Remote control system to prevent open-
ing of the rear doors using their interior
controls and use of the rear electric win-
dows.
The control is located on the driver's
door, with the electric window controls.
Press button A .
The indicator lamp on button A comes
on, accompanied by a message on the
multifunction screen.
This indicator lamp remains on until the
child lock is deactivated.
Locking
Unlocking
Turn the red control one quarter of
a turn to the right using the ignition
key.
Activation
Deactivation
Press button A again.
The indicator lamp on button A switches
off, accompanied by a message on the
multifunction screen.
This indicator lamp remains off until the
child lock is activated.
Any other status of the indicator
lamp indicates a malfunction of the
electric child lock. Have it checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer.
i
i
128
SAFETY
DIRECTION INDICATORS
If you forget to cancel the direction
indicators for more than twenty sec-
onds, the volume of the audible
signal will increase if the speed is
above 40 mph (60 km/h).
Left: lower the lighting stalk passing
the point of resistance.
Right: raise the lighting stalk passing
the point of resistance.
HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
A visual warning by means of the direc-
tion indicators to alert other road users to
a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.
Press this button, the direction
indicators fl ash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
Automatic operation of hazard
warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, de-
pending on the deceleration, the hazard
warning lamps come on automatically.
They switch off automatically the fi rst
time you accelerate.
You can also switch them off by
pressing the button.
HORN
Press one of the spokes of the
steering wheel.
Use the horn moderately and only
in the following cases:
- immediate danger,
- overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian,
- when approaching an area
where there is no visibility.
Audible warning to alert other road users
to an imminent danger.
!
i
i
i
129
SAFETY
TYRE UNDER-INFLATION
DETECTION
System which automatically and contin-
uously checks the pressure of the tyres
while driving.
All repairs and changing of tyres on
a wheel fi tted with this system must
be carried out by a PEUGEOT
dealer.
If, when changing a tyre, you in-
stall a wheel which is not detected
by your vehicle (example: fi tting
of snow tyres), you must have the
system reinitialised by a PEUGEOT
dealer.
This system does not eliminate the
need to have the tyre pressures
checked regularly (refer to the
"Identifi cation markings" section) to
ensure that the optimum dynamic
performance of the vehicle is main-
tained and prevent premature wear
of the tyres, particularly in arduous
driving conditions (heavy load, high
speed).
The tyre pressures must be checked
cold, at least once a month. Re-
member to check the pressure of
the spare wheel.
The tyre under-infl ation detection
system may experience temporary
interference due to electro-magnet
ic
emissions on a frequency close to
that used by the system.
Sensors fi tted in each valve trigger a
warning in the event of problem (speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h)).
This warning lamp is displayed on the
instrument panel and/or a message
appears on the multifunction screen,
accompanied by an audible signal,
to locate the wheel concerned.
Check the tyre pressures as soon
as possible.
This check must be carried out when
the tyres are cold.
Flat tyre
The STOP warning lamp comes
on and/or this warning lamp
is displayed on the instrument
panel, accompanied by an au-
dible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen locat-
ing the wheel concerned.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so,
avoiding any sudden movement of
the steering wheel and the brakes.
Repair or change the damaged
wheel (punctured or very defl ated
tyre), and have the tyre pressure
checked as soon as possible.
Puncture
The tyre under-infl ation detection
system is an aid to driving which does
not replace the need for the driver to
be vigilant or to drive responsibly.
Sensor(s) not detected or faulty
This warning lamp is displayed
on the instrument panel and/or
a message appears on the mul-
tifunction screen, accompanied
by an audible signal, to locate the wheel
or wheels which are not detected or to
indicate a fault in the system.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer to replace
the faulty sensor(s).
This message is also displayed
when one of the wheels is away
from the vehicle (being repaired) or
when one or more wheels without a
sensor are fi tted.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
spare wheel, this is not fi tted with
a sensor.
!
i
!
130
SAFETY
BRAKING ASSISTANCE
SYSTEMS
Group of supplementary systems which
help you to obtain optimum braking in
complete safety in emergency situations:
- anti-lock braking system (ABS),
- electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD),
- emergency braking assistance
(EBA).
Anti-lock braking system
and electronic brake force
distribution
Linked systems which improve the sta-
bility and manoeuvrability of your vehi-
cle when braking, in particular on poor
or slippery surfaces.
When braking in an emergency,
press very fi rmly without releasing
the pressure.
When replacing wheels (tyres and
rims), ensure that they conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible sig-
nal and a message on the mul-
tifunction screen, it indicates a
malfunction of the anti-lock braking sys-
tem which could result in loss of control
of the vehicle when braking.
If this warning lamp comes on,
together with the STOP and
ABS warning lamps, accompa-
nied by an audible signal and a
message on the multifunction screen, it
indicates a malfunction of the electron-
ic brake force distribution which could
result in loss of control of the vehicle
when braking.
You must stop as soon as it is safe
to do so.
Emergency braking assistance
System which, in an emergency, enables
you to obtain the optimum braking
pressure more quickly, thus reducing the
stopping distance.
Activation
The anti-lock braking system comes
into operation automatically when there
is a risk of wheel lock.
Normal operation of the ABS may make
itself felt by slight vibration of the brake
pedal.
Activation
It is triggered by the speed at which the
brake pedal is pressed.
The effect of this is a reduction in the
resistance of the pedal and an increase
in braking effi ciency.
In either case, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer.
When braking in an emergency,
press fi rmly without releasing the
pressure.
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE
CALL
This system allows you to make an
emergency or assistance call to the
emergency services or to the dedicated
PEUGEOT service.
For more information on the use of this
function, refer to the "Audio and tele-
matics" section.
!
SAFETY
The ESP/ASR systems offer ex-
ceptional safety in normal driving,
but this should not encourage the
driver to take extra risks or drive at
high speed.
The correct functioning of these
systems depends on observation
of the manufacturer's recommen-
dations regarding the wheels (tyres
and rims), the braking components,
the electronic components and the
repair and assembly procedures
used by PEUGEOT dealers.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Disarming
In exceptional conditions (starting a
vehicle which is bogged down, stuck
in snow, on soft ground, ...), it may be
advisable to disarm the ASR and ESP
systems, so that the wheels can move
freely and regain grip.
Press the "ESP OFF" button, located
in the centre of the dashboard.
If this warning lamp comes on on
the instrument panel and the indi-
cator lamp on the button comes
on, this indicates that the ASR and
ESP systems are deactivated.
Reactivation
These systems are reactivated automat-
ically each time the ignition is switched
back on or from 30 mph (50 km/h)
(except in the case of the 1.6 l THP 16V
175 bhp petrol engine).
Press the "ESP OFF" button again
to reactivate them manually.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible sig-
nal and a message on the multi-
function screen, this indicates a
malfunction of these systems.
Have the systems checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer.
TRAJECTORY CONTROL
SYSTEMS
Activation
These systems are activated automati-
cally each time the vehicle is started.
They come into operation in the event
of a grip or trajectory problem.
Anti-skid regulation (ASR) and
electronic stability programme
(ESP)
This is indicated by fl ashing of
this warning lamp on the instru-
ment panel.
The anti-skid regulation (also known as
Traction Control) optimises traction to
prevent skidding of the wheels, by act-
ing on the brakes of the driving wheels
and on the engine.
The electronic stability programme acts
on the brake of one or more wheels and
on the engine to keep the vehicle on the
trajectory required by the driver, within
the limits of the laws of physics.
132
SAFETY
SEAT BELTS
Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fi tted with a pre-
tensioning and force limiting system.
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front impact. De-
pending on the severity of the impact,
the pretensioning system instantly tight-
ens the seat belts against the body of
the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active
when the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure
of the seat belt on the chest of the occu-
pant, so improving their protection.
Fastening
Unfastening
Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
Height adjustment
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue
in the buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
To lower the attachment point,
squeeze the control A and slide it
downwards.
To raise the attachment point, slide
the control A upwards.
133
SAFETY
Seat belt not fastened/unfastened
warning lamp
When the ignition is switched
on, this warning lamp comes
on, either on the instrument
panel or on the seat belt and
passenger's front airbag warning lamps
display, if the driver and/or the front pas-
senger has not fastened their seat belt.
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h)
this warning lamp fl ashes for two min-
utes accompanied by an audible sig-
nal of increasing volume. Once these
two minutes have elapsed, this warning
lamp remains on until the driver and/or
the front passenger fastens their seat
belt.
* According to version and/or country.
Seat belt not fastened/unfastened
warning lamps display
1. Front seat belts not fastened/
unfastened warning lamp.
2. Driver's seat belt not fastened/
unfastened warning lamp.
3. Front passenger's seat belt not
fastened/unfastened or unfastened
warning lamp * .
The corresponding warning lamp 2 or 3
comes on in red on the seat belt and
passenger's front airbag warning lamps
display if the seat belt is not fastened or
is unfastened.
Rear seat belts
The rear seats are each fi t-
ted with a three-point seat
belt with pretensioner and
for the side seats a force
limiter.
Fastening
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue
in the buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
On the outer seat belts, raise the bar
to the top of the backrest to prevent
the tongue from knocking against
the side trim.
134
SAFETY
Unfastening
Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
On the outer seat belts, raise the bar
to the top of the backrest to prevent
the tongue from knocking against
the side trim.
Seat belt unfastened warning lamp
This warning lamp comes on,
either on the instrument panel
or on the seat belt and pas-
senger's front airbag warning
lamps display, when one or more rear
passengers unfasten their seat belt.
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h),
this warning lamp fl ashes for two min-
utes accompanied by an audible sig-
nal of increasing volume. Once these
two minutes have elapsed, this warning
lamp remains on until the one or more
rear passengers fasten their seat belt.
1. Rear seat belts unfastened warning
lamp.
4. Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
5. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
6. Rear left seat belt warning lamp.
Seat belt unfastened warning lamps
display
When the ignition is switched on, with
the engine running or when the vehicle
is moving at less than 12 mph (20 km/h),
the corresponding warning lamps 4 , 5
and 6 come on in red for approximately
30 seconds, if the seat belt is not fas-
tened.
When the vehicle is moving at more
than 12 mph (20 km/h), the correspond-
ing warning lamp 4 , 5 or 6 comes on
in red, accompanied by an audible sig-
nal and a message on the multifunction
screen, if a rear passenger has unfas-
tened their seat belt.
2nd row rear seat belts
The rear seats are each fi t-
ted with a three-point seat
belt, with force limiter and, for the outer
seats, a pretensioner.
Fastening
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue
in the buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
i
i
135
SAFETY
2nd row rear centre
seat belt
Installation
Removal and storing
Press the red button on the buckle B ,
then on the buckle A .
Guide the strap as it reels in and
bring the tongue B , then A onto the
magnet of the attachment point on
the roof.
3rd row rear seat belts
Installation
Pull the strap and insert the tongue C
in the buckle, on the boot side trim
side.
Insert the tongue D in the opposite
buckle.
Check the fastening of each buckle
by pulling the strap.
Pull the strap and insert the tongue A
in the left-hand buckle.
Insert the tongue B in the right-hand
buckle.
Check the fastening of each buckle
by pulling the strap.
The seat belts for the rear seats of the
3rd row are located at the corner of the
corresponding boot pillar and roof.
If the two outer seats of the 2nd row
are moved inwards, always use the
outer rear seat belts.
Removal and storing
Press the red button on the buckle D ,
then on the buckle C .
Guide the strap as it reels in and
bring the tongue D , then C onto the
magnet of the attachment point on
the corresponding boot pillar.
The seat belt for the rear centre seat of
the 2nd row is located at the rear left of
the roof.
The 3rd row of seats (SW with
panoramic sunroof) is not fi tted
with seat belt unfastened warning
lamps.
i
136
SAFETY
The driver must ensure that passen-
gers use the seat belts correctly and
that they are all restrained securely
before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the ve-
hicle, always fasten your seat belt,
even for short journeys.
Do not invert the seat belt buckles as
they will not fulfi l their role fully.
The seat belts are fi tted with an inertia
reel permitting automatic adjustment
of the length of the strap to your size.
The seat belt is stored automatically
when not in use.
Before and after use, ensure that the
seat belt is reeled in correctly.
The lower part of the strap must be
positioned as low as possible on the
pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in
the hollow of the shoulder.
The inertia reels are fi tted with an au-
tomatic locking device which comes
into operation in the event of a colli-
sion, emergency braking or if the ve-
hicle rolls over. You can release the
device by pulling fi rmly on the strap
and releasing it so that it re-winds
slightly.
In order to be effective, a seat belt
must:
- be tightened as close to the body
as possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a
smooth movement, checking that
it does not twist,
- be used to restrain only one
person,
- not bear any trace of cuts or
fraying,
- not be converted or modifi ed to
avoid affecting its performance.
In accordance with current safety
regulations, all repairs and checks
must be carried out by a PEUGEOT
dealer who guarantees that the work
is carried out correctly.
Have your seat belts checked regu-
larly by a PEUGEOT dealer and par-
ticularly if the straps show signs of
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
water or a textile cleaning product,
sold by PEUGEOT dealers.
After folding or moving a seat or rear
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt
is positioned and reeled in correctly.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the pas-
senger is less than 12 years old or
shorter than one and a half metres.
Never use the same seat belt to se-
cure more than one person.
Never allow a child to travel on your
lap.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and se-
riousness of the impacts , the pre-
tensioning device may be triggered
before and independently of the air-
bags. Triggering of the pre-tensioners
is accompanied by a slight discharge
of harmless smoke and a noise, due
to the activation of the pyrotechnic
cartridge incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
comes on.
Following an impact, have the seat
belts system checked, and if neces-
sary replaced, by a PEUGEOT dealer.
i
!
137
SAFETY
AIRBAGS
Triggering of the airbag(s) is accom-
panied by a slight emission of harm-
less smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic car-
tridge incorporated in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sen-
sitive individuals may experience
slight irritation.
The noise of the detonation may
result in a slight loss of hearing for
a short time.
Front airbags
System which protects the driver and
front passenger in the event of a seri-
ous front impact in order to limit the risk
of injury to the head and chest.
The driver's airbag is incorporated in
the centre of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is incorporated
in the dashboard above the glove box.
Activation
The airbags are triggered simultane-
ously, unless the passenger's front
airbag is deactivated, in the event of a
serious front impact to all or part of the
front impact zone A , in the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal
plane and directed from the front to the
rear of the vehicle.
The front airbag infl ates between the front
occupant of the vehicle and the dash-
board to cushion his forward movement.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
The airbags do not operate when
the ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy
once. If a second impact occurs
(during the same or a subsequent
accident), the airbag will not be
triggered again.
System designed to maximise the safety
of the occupants (with the exception of
the rear centre passenger) in the event
of violent collisions. It supplements the
action of the force-limiting seat belts
(with the exception of the rear centre
passenger).
If a collision occurs, the electronic de-
tectors record and analyse the front and
side impacts sustained in the impact
detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the
airbags are triggered instantly and
protect the occupants of the vehicle
(with the exception of the rear centre
passenger); immediately after the
impact, the airbags defl ate rapidly
so that they do not hinder visibility
or the exit of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact
or in certain roll-over conditions,
the airbags will not be triggered;
the seat belt alone is suffi cient to
provide optimum protection in these
situations.
!
!
138
SAFETY
If at least one of the two airbag
warning lamps come on continu-
ously, do not install a child seat on
the front passenger seat.
Have the system checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on on
the instrument panel, accompa-
nied by an audible warning and
a message on the multifunction
screen, contact a PEUGEOT dealer to
have the system checked. The airbags
may no longer be triggered in the event of
a serious impact.
Steering column airbag *
System which protects the driver's knees
in the event of a serious front impact.
This airbag is incorporated in the dash-
board below the steering column.
Activation
It is deployed at the same time as the
front airbags.
Reactivation
When you remove the child seat, turn
the switch to the "ON" position to re-
activate the airbag and so assure the
safety of your front passenger in the
event of an impact.
With the ignition on, this warn-
ing lamp comes on on the seat
belt and passenger's front air-
bag warning lamps display for
approximately one minute, if the pas-
senger's front airbag is activated.
To assure the safety of your child,
it is imperative that the passenger's
front airbag is deactivated when
you install a "rear facing" child seat
on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk be-
ing seriously injured or killed if the
airbag were triggered.
According to version, this warn-
ing lamp comes on either on
the instrument panel or on the
seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display when the
ignition is on and until the airbag is re-
activated.
If this warning lamp fl ashes,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
The passenger's front airbag
may no longer be triggered in
the event of a serious impact.
Deactivation
Only the passenger's front airbag can
be deactivated:
with the ignition off , insert the key
in the passenger airbag deactivation
switch,
turn it to the "OFF" position,
then, remove the key keeping the
switch in the new position.
* According to country.
!
139
SAFETY
Lateral airbags
System which protects the driver and
passengers (with the exception of the
rear centre passenger) in the event of a
serious side impact in order to limit the
risk of injury to the chest.
Each lateral airbag is incorporated:
- in the front, in the seat back frame,
on the door side,
- in the rear, in the side trim (except
on 3-door and SW models).
Activation
The lateral airbags are triggered unilater-
ally in the event of a serious side impact
applied to all or part of the side impact
zone B , perpendicular to the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal
plane and directed from the outside to-
wards the inside of the vehicle.
Curtain airbags
System which protects the driver and
passengers (with the exception of the
rear centre passenger) in the event of a
serious side impact in order to limit the
risk of injury to the side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pil-
lars and the upper passenger compart-
ment area.
Operating fault
Activation
The curtain airbag is triggered at the same
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in
the event of a serious side impact applied
to all or part of the side impact zone B ,
perpendicular to the longitudinal cen-
treline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
and directed from the outside towards the
inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag infl ates between the
front or rear occupant of the vehicle and
the windows.
In the event of a minor impact or
bump on the side of the vehicle or
if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag
may not be triggered.
In the event of a rear or front colli-
sion, the airbag is not triggered.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
If this warning lamp comes on
on the instrument panel, accom-
panied by an audible signal and
a message on the multifunction
screen, contact a PEUGEOT dealer to
have the system checked. The airbags
may no longer be triggered in the event
of a serious impact.
The lateral airbag infl ates between the
front or rear occupant of the vehicle and
the corresponding door trim panel.
!
140
SAFETY
For the airbags to be fully
effective, observe the following
safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not leave anything between the
occupants and the airbags (a child,
pet, object...). This could hamper the
operation of the airbags or injure the
occupants.
* According to country.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats. These will not hinder infl ation of the
lateral airbags. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
Do not fi x or attach anything to the seat backs (clothing...). This could cause
injury to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is triggered.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.
Curtain airbags
Do not fi x or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if
the curtain airbag is triggered.
Do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing
the curtain airbags.
After an accident or if the vehicle has
been stolen or broken into, have the
airbag systems checked.
All work on the airbag system is strict-
ly forbidden unless it is carried out by
qualifi ed personnel of the PEUGEOT
dealer network.
Even if all of the precautions men-
tioned are observed, a risk of injury
or of minor burns to the head, chest
or arms when an airbag is triggered
cannot be ruled out. The bag infl ates
almost instantly (within a few millisec-
onds) then defl ates within the same
time discharging the hot gas via
openings provided for this purpose.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on
the centre part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard.
If possible, do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the
risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently.
Steering column air bag *
Do not sit with your knees any nearer to the steering wheel than necessary.
!
i
!
141
DRIVING
When parking on a slope, direct
your wheels against the pavement,
apply the parking brake and engage
a gear.
PARKING BRAKE
Applying
Pull the parking brake lever fully up
to immobilise your vehicle.
When the vehicle is being driven,
if this warning lamp and the STOP
warning lamp come on, accom-
panied by an audible signal and a
message on the multifunction screen, this
indicates that the parking brake is still on
or has not been properly released.
Releasing
Pull the parking brake lever gently,
press the release button then lower
the lever fully.
6-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX
As a safety precaution and to facili-
tate starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
Only engage reverse gear when
the vehicle is stationary with the
engine at idle.
Engaging reverse gear
Raise the ring under the knob and
push the gear lever to the left then
forwards.
i
142
DRIVING
GEAR CHANGE INDICATOR *
System which reduces fuel consumption
by advising the driver to change up on
vehicles fi tted with a manual gearbox.
Operation
The system intervenes only when driving
economically.
Depending on the driving situation and
your vehicle's equipment, the system
may advise you to skip one or more
gears. You can follow this instruc-
tion without engaging the intermediate
gears.
The gear engagement recommenda-
tions must not be considered compulsory.
In fact, the confi guration of the road, the
amount of traffi c and safety remain deter-
mining factors when choosing the best
gear. Therefore, the driver remains re-
sponsible for deciding whether or not to
follow the advice given by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
* According to engine.
Example:
- You are in third gear.
- You press the accelerator pedal
moderately.
- The system may suggest that you
engage a higher gear, if appropriate.
The information appears in the form of an
arrow on the instrument panel display.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
this arrow may be accompanied by the
recommended gear.
In the case of driving which makes
particular demands on the perfor-
mance of the engine (fi rm pres-
sure on the accelerator pedal, for
example, when overtaking...), the
system will not recommend a gear
change.
The system never suggests:
- engaging fi rst gear,
- engaging reverse gear,
- engaging a lower gear.
i
143
DRIVING
6-SPEED ELECTRONIC
GEAR CONTROL GEARBOX
Gear lever
R. Reverse
With your foot on the brake, move
the lever upwards to select this
position.
N. Neutral.
With your foot on the brake, select
this position to start.
A. Automatic mode.
Move the lever downwards to select
this mode.
M +/-. Sequential mode with manual
changing of the gears.
Move the lever downwards then to
the left to select this mode, then:
- push the lever forwards to change
up a gear,
- or pull the lever rearwards to
change down a gear.
S. Sport function.
Press this button to activate or
deactivate this function.
Steering mounted controls
+. Change up control paddle to the
right of the steering wheel.
Press the back of the "+" steering
wheel control paddle to change up a
gear.
-. Change down control paddle to the
left of the steering wheel.
Press the back of the "-" steering
wheel control paddle to change
down a gear.
The steering wheel control paddles
do not permit the selection of neu-
tral or engaging or disengaging re-
verse gear.
Six-speed electronic gear control gear-
box which offers a choice between the
comfort of fully automatic operation or
the pleasure of manual gear changing.
Three driving modes are offered:
- automatic mode for automatic
control of the gears by the gearbox,
- sequential mode for manual
changing of the gears by the driver,
- auto sequential mode to overtake,
for example, remaining in automatic
mode while using the functions of
the sequential mode.
A Sport function is available in auto-
matic or sequential mode for a more dy-
namic style of driving.
Having this gearbox provides you with
an additional function: hill start assist .
i
i
!
i
144
DRIVING
Displays on the instrument panel
Gear lever positions
Moving off
N. Neutral
R. Reverse
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
Gears in sequential mode
AUTO. This comes on when the auto-
matic mode is selected. It switches off
on changing to sequential mode.
S. Sport (Sport function)
Press the brake pedal when
this warning lamp fl ashes
(e.g.: when starting the
engine).
Select position N .
Press the brake pedal down fully.
Start the engine.
Select fi rst gear (position M or A ) or
reverse (position R ).
Release the parking brake.
Take your foot off the brake pedal,
then accelerate.
AUTO and 1 or R appear on
the instrument panel screen.
Do not hold the vehicle using the
accelerator.
N fl ashes on the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message on the multifunc-
tion screen, if the gear lever is not
in position N on starting.
Foot on brake fl ashes on the in-
strument panel, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen, if the brake
pedal is not pressed on starting.
Hill start assist
This is an additional function associated
with this gearbox. It allows temporary
immobilisation of your vehicle.
It maintains the pressure of the brakes
briefl y, long enough for you to move
your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
Never leave the vehicle during a
hill start assist phase.
It comes into operation if the vehicle is
immobilised by pressing the brake pedal
and depending on the gradient:
- on an ascending gradient, with the
vehicle stationary, gear lever in
position A or M , the vehicle is held
briefl y when the brake pedal is
released,
- on a descending gradient, with the
vehicle stationary, gear lever in
position R , the vehicle is held briefl y
when the brake pedal is released.
An audible signal is heard when re-
verse gear is engaged.
N appears on the instrument
panel screen.
Foot on brake
i
! i
145
DRIVING
Sequential mode
When the vehicle has moved off,
select position M to change to
sequential mode.
AUTO disappears and the
gears engaged appear in suc-
cession on the instrument
panel screen.
The gear change requests are only car-
ried out if the engine speed permits.
It is not necessary to release the accel-
erator during gear changes.
When braking or slowing down, the
gearbox changes down automatically to
permit reacceleration of the vehicle in
the correct gear.
The gearbox is then operating in auto-
active mode, without any action on the
part of the driver. It continuously selects
the most suitable gear in relation to the
following parameters:
- style of driving,
- profi le of the road.
AUTO and the gear engaged
appear on the instrument pan-
el screen.
Automatic mode
Following use of the sequential
mode, select position A to return to
the automatic mode.
"Auto sequential mode"
This mode enables you to overtake, for
example, remaining in automatic mode
while using the functions of the sequen-
tial mode.
Operate steering wheel control
paddle + or - .
The gearbox engages the gear request-
ed if the engine speed permits. AUTO is
still displayed on the instrument panel.
After a few moments without any action
on the controls, the gearbox resumes
automatic control of the gears.
At very low speed, if reverse gear
is requested, this will only be taken
into account when the vehicle is
immobilised. The Foot on brake
warning lamp may fl ash on the in-
strument panel to prompt you to
brake.
At high speed, if reverse gear is re-
quested, the N indicator lamp will
fl ash and the gearbox will change
to neutral automatically. To engage
a gear again, return the lever to po-
sition A or M .
On sharp acceleration, the gearbox
will not change up unless the driver
acts on the gear lever or the steer-
ing mounted controls.
Never select neutral N while the
vehicle is moving.
Only engage reverse gear R when
the vehicle is immobilised with the
brake pedal pressed.
For optimum acceleration, for exam-
ple when overtaking another vehicle,
press the accelerator pedal fi rmly
past the point of resistance.
!!
i
146
DRIVING
Stopping the vehicle Operating fault
With the ignition on, if this warn-
ing lamp comes on and AUTO
fl ashes, accompanied by an au-
dible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen, this indicates
a malfunction of the gearbox.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
It is essential to press the brake
pedal when starting the engine.
When parking, is it essential to ap-
ply the parking brake to immobilise
the vehicle, whatever the circum-
stances.
When immobilising the vehicle,
with the engine running, it is es-
sential to place the gear lever in
neutral N .
Before carrying out any work in the
engine compartment, check that
the gear lever is in neutral N and
that the parking brake is applied.
With the ignition on, if the warn-
ing lamp above and this warning
lamp come on, accompanied
by an audible signal and a mes-
sage on the multifunction screen, this
indicates a malfunction of the hill start
assist system.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Sport function
Following selection of the sequential
mode or automatic mode, press
button S to activate the Sport
function which offers you a more
dynamic style of driving.
S appears next to the gear en-
gaged on the instrument panel
screen.
Press button S again to deactivate
the function.
S is then cleared from the instrument
panel screen.
The Sport function is deactivated
each time the ignition is switched
off.
Before switching off the engine, you can
choose to:
- move to position N to engage neutral,
- leave the gear engaged; in this
case, it will not be possible to move
the vehicle.
In both cases, it is essential that you ap-
ply the parking brake to immobilise the
vehicle.
This warning lamp may also come on if
a door is opened.
147
DRIVING
"PORSCHE TIPTRONIC
SYSTEM" AUTOMATIC
GEARBOX
Four or six speed automatic gearbox
which offers a choice between the comfort
of fully automatic operation, enhanced by
sport and snow programmes, or manual
gear changing.
Four driving modes are provided:
- automatic operation for electronic
management of the gears by the
gearbox,
- sport programme for a more
dynamic style of driving,
- snow programme to improve driving
when traction is poor,
- manual operation for sequential
changing of the gears by the driver.
Gear lever
P. Park.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking
brake on or off.
- Starting the engine.
R. Reverse.
- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle
stationary, engine at idle.
N. Neutral.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking
brake on.
- Starting the engine.
D. Automatic operation.
M.+/- Manual operation with sequential
changing of the four or six gears.
Push forwards to change up through
the gears.
or
Pull rearwards to change down
through the gears.
Displays on the instrument panel
When you move the lever in the gate to
select a position, the corresponding in-
dicator lamp is displayed on the instru-
ment panel.
P. Park
R. Reverse
N. Neutral
D. Drive (Automatic driving)
S. Sport programme
. Snow programme
1 to 4. Gear engaged during
1 to 6. manual operation
-. Invalid value during manual
operation
Press the brake pedal when
this indicator lamp fl ashes
(e.g.: starting the enine).
Gear selection gate
1. Gear lever.
2. Button " S " (sport) .
3. Button " " (snow) .
Foot on brake
!
!
i
148
DRIVING
Moving off
Apply the parking brake.
Select position P or N .
Start the engine.
If this procedure is not followed, an au-
dible signal is heard, accompanied by a
message on the multifunction screen.
With the engine running, press the
brake pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Select position R , D or M ,
Gradually release the brake pedal.
The vehicle moves off immediately.
If position N is engaged inadver-
tently while driving, allow the en-
gine to return to idle then engage
position D to accelerate.
The gearbox then operates in auto-
adaptive mode, without any intervention
on the part of the driver. It continuously
selects the most suitable gear accord-
ing to the style of driving, the profi le of
the road and the load in the vehicle.
For maximum acceleration without
touching the lever, press the accelera-
tor pedal down fully (kick down). The
gearbox changes down automatically
or maintains the gear selected until the
maximum engine speed is reached.
On braking, the gearbox changes down
automatically to provide effi cient engine
braking.
If you release the accelerator sharply,
the gearbox will not change to a higher
gear for safety reasons.
Automatic operation
Select position D for automatic
changing of the four or six gears.
appears on the instrument
panel.
Snow programme " "
Press button " ", after starting the
engine.
The gearbox adapts to driving on slip-
pery roads.
This programme improves starting and
drive when traction is poor.
S appears on the instrument
panel.
Sport programme "S"
Press button "S" , after starting the
engine.
The gearbox automatically favours a
dynamic style of driving.
Never select position N while the
vehicle is moving.
Never select positions P or R unless
the vehicle is completely stationary.
When the engine is running at
idle, with the brakes released, if
position R , D or M is selected, the
vehicle moves even without the ac-
celerator being pressed.
When the engine is running, never
leave children in the vehicle with-
out supervision.
When carrying out maintenance with
the engine running, apply the park-
ing brake and select position P .
Sport and snow programmes
These two special programmes supple-
ment the automatic operation in very
specifi c conditions of use.
Return to automatic operation
At any time, press the button
selected again to quit the programme
engaged and return to auto-adaptive
mode.
!
i
149
DRIVING
Stopping the vehicle
Before switching off the engine, you
can engage position P or N to place the
gearbox in neutral.
In both cases, apply the parking brake
to immobilise the vehicle.
Operating fault
When the ignition is on, the
lighting of this warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible sig-
nal and a message on the multi-
function screen, indicates a gearbox
malfunction.
In this case, the gearbox switches to
emergency mode and is locked in 3rd
gear. You may feel a substantial knock
when changing from P to R and from N
to R . This will not cause any damage to
the gearbox.
Do not exceed a speed of 60 mph
(100 km/h), local speed restrictions per-
mitting.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
This warning lamp may also come on if
a door is opened.
There is a risk of damage to the
gearbox:
- if you press the accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time,
- if you force the lever from
position P to another position
when the battery is fl at.
Manual operation
Select position M for sequential
changing of the four or six gears.
Push the lever towards the + sign to
change up a gear.
Pull the lever towards the - sign to
change down a gear.
D disappears and the gears
engaged appear in succes-
sion on the instrument panel.
In the event of under-revving
or over-revving, the gear se-
lected fl ashes for a few seconds, then
the actual gear engaged is displayed.
If the lever is not in position P ,
when the driver's door is opened or
approximately 45 seconds after the
ignition is switched off, an audible
signal is heard and a message ap-
pears.
Return the lever to position P ;
the audible signal stops and the
message disappears.
It is only possible to change from one
gear to another if the vehicle speed and
engine speed permit; otherwise, the
gearbox will operate temporarily in au-
tomatic mode.
Invalid value during manual
operation
This symbol is displayed if a
gear is not engaged correctly
(selector between two posi-
tions).
It is possible to change from position D
(automatic) to position M (manual) at
any time.
When the vehicle is stationary or moving
very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1
automatically.
The sport and snow programmes do not
operate in manual mode.
To limit fuel consumption when sta-
tionary for long periods with the en-
gine running (traffi c jam...), place
the gear lever in position N and apply
the parking brake.
i
150
DRIVING
SPEED LIMITER
System which prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by
the driver.
When the programmed speed limit is
reached, pressing the accelerator pedal
no longer has any effect.
The controls of this system are grouped
together on stalk A .
1. Speed limiter mode selection dial
2. Value decrease button
3. Value increase button
4. Speed limiter on/off button
The programmed information is grouped
together on the instrument panel screen.
5. Speed limiter on/off indication
6.
Speed limiter mode selection indication
7. Programmed speed value
Steering mounted controls Displays on the instrument panel
The speed limiter cannot, in any
circumstances, replace the need
to respect speed limits, nor can it
replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the
driver.
The speed limiter is switched on manu-
ally: it requires a programmed speed of
at least 20 mph (30 km/h).
The speed limiter is switched off by
manual operation of the control.
The programmed speed can be exceed-
ed temporarily by pressing the accelera-
tor fi rmly.
To return to the programmed speed,
simply slow down to a speed below the
programmed speed.
The programmed speed remains in the
memory when the ignition is switched off.
!
DRIVING
On a steep descent or in the event
of sharp acceleration, the speed
limiter will not be able to prevent
the vehicle from exceeding the pro-
grammed speed.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- do not fi t one mat on top of
another.
Programming
Turn dial 1 to the "LIMIT" position:
the speed limiter mode is selected
but is not switched on (OFF).
You do not have to switch the speed
limiter on in order to set the speed.
Exceeding the programmed speed
Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the programmed
speed will not have any effect unless you press the pedal
fi rmly past the point of resistance .
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the pro-
grammed speed, which is still displayed, fl ashes.
Returning to the programmed speed, by means of intentional
or unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically
cancels the fl ashing of the programmed speed.
Return to normal driving
Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the speed limiter mode
is deselected. The display returns to the distance
recorder.
Operating fault
In the event of a speed limiter malfunc-
tion, the speed is cleared resulting in
fl ashing of the dashes.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer.
Switch the speed limiter off by pressing button 4 : the
display confi rms that it has been switched off (OFF).
Switch the speed limiter back on by pressing button 4
again.
Set the speed value by pressing button 2 or 3 (e.g.: 55 mph
(90 km/h)).
You can then change the programmed speed using but-
tons 2 and 3 :
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.
Switch the speed limiter on by pressing button 4 .
i
152
DRIVING
CRUISE CONTROL
System which automatically maintains
the speed of the vehicle at the value
programmed by the driver, without any
action on the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on
manually: it requires a minimum vehicle
speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) and the en-
gaging:
- of fourth gear on the manual
gearbox,
- of second gear on the electronic
gear control gearbox or automatic
gearbox, in sequential driving mode,
- of position A on the electronic
gear control gearbox or D on the
automatic gearbox.
The controls of this system are grouped
together on lever A .
1. Cruise control mode selection dial
2. Speed programming/programmed
value decrease button
3. Speed programming/programmed
value increase button
4. Cruise control off/resume button
The programmed information is grouped
together on the instrument panel display.
5. Cruise control off/resume indication
6.
Cruise control mode selection indication
7. Programmed speed value
Steering mounted controls Displays on the instrument panel
The cruise control cannot, in any
circumstances, replace the need
to respect speed limits, nor can it
replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the
driver.
The cruise control is switched off manu-
ally or by pressing the brake or clutch
pedal or on triggering of the ESP system
for safety reasons.
It is possible to exceed the programmed
speed temporarily by pressing the ac-
celerator pedal.
To return to the programmed speed,
simply release the accelerator pedal.
Switching off the ignition cancels any
programmed speed value.
!
DRIVING
When the cruise control is switched
on, be careful if you maintain the
pressure on one of the programmed
speed changing buttons: this may
result in a very rapid change in the
speed of your vehicle.
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads or in heavy traffi c.
On a steep descent, the cruise
control will not be able to prevent
the vehicle from exceeding the pro-
grammed speed.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- never fi t one mat on top of
another.
Programming
Turn dial 1 to the "CRUISE"
position: the cruise control mode
is selected but is not switched on
(OFF).
Exceeding the programmed speed
Intentional or unintentional exceeding of the programmed
speed results in fl ashing of this speed on the display.
Return to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or
unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically can-
cels the fl ashing of the speed.
Return to normal driving
Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the cruise control mode
is deselected. The display returns to the distance
recorder.
Operating fault
In the event of a cruise control malfunc-
tion, the speed is cleared resulting in
fl ashing of the dashes.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Set the programmed speed by
accelerating to the required
speed, then press button 2 or 3
(e.g.: 70 mph (110 km/h)).
Switch off the cruise control by pressing button 4 : the
display confi rms that it has been switched off (OFF).
Switch the cruise control back on by pressing button 4
again.
You can then change the programmed speed using but-
tons 2 and 3 :
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.
i
!
154
DRIVING
REAR PARKING SENSORS
System consisting of four proximity sen-
sors, located in the rear bumper.
This detects any obstacle (person, ve-
hicle, tree, gate, etc.) behind the vehicle,
except obstacles located just below the
bumper.
An object, such as a stake, a road-
works cone or any other similar
object may be detected at the be-
ginning of the manoeuvre, but may
no longer be detected when the
vehicle comes close to it.
The parking sensor system can-
not, in any circumstances, take
the place of the vigilance and re-
sponsibility of the driver.
Activation
The system is activated as soon as re-
verse gear is engaged, accompanied
by an audible signal. The proximity in-
formation is given by:
- an audible signal, which becomes
more rapid as the vehicle approaches
the obstacle.
- a graphic on the multifunction
screen, with blocks which become
increasingly closer to the vehicle.
When the distance between the rear of
the vehicle and the obstacle is less than
thirty centimetres, the audible signal be-
comes continuous and the "Danger" sym-
bol appears on the multifunction screen.
On completion of the manoeuvre, when
you exit reverse gear, the system be-
comes inactive.
Programming
You can activate or deactivate the
system by means of the multifunction
screen confi guration menu. The system
state is memorised when switching off
the ignition.
For more information on access to the
parking assistance menu, refer to ve-
hicle confi guration in the "Multifunction
screens" section corresponding to your
screen.
The system will be deactivated auto-
matically when towing a trailer or when
a bicycle carrier is fi tted (vehicle fi tted
with a towbar or bicycle carrier recom-
mended by PEUGEOT).
Operating faults
If there is an operating fault,
when reverse gear is engaged
this warning lamp comes on on
the instrument panel, accompa-
nied by an audible signal (short beep)
and a message on the multifunction
screen.
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that
the sensors are not covered with mud,
frost or snow.
i
i
155
DRIVING
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL FRONT
AND REAR PARKING SENSORS
System consisting of four proximity
sensors, installed in the front and rear
bumpers.
It detects any obstacle (person, vehicle,
tree, barrier...) located in front of and
behind the vehicle, except for obstacles
located immediately below the bumper.
The parking sensors are switched on :
- by engaging reverse gear,
- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in
forward gear.
This is accompanied by an audible signal
and/or displaying of the vehicle on the
multifunction screen.
An object, such as a stake, a road-
works cone or any other similar
object may be detected at the start
of the manoeuvre but may no lon-
ger be detected when the vehicle
moves nearer to it.
The proximity information is indicated by:
- an audible signal which becomes
more rapid as the vehicle approaches
the obstacle,
- a diagram on the multifunction
screen, with blocks which move
closer to the vehicle.
The obstacle is located in relation to the
emission of the audible signal by the
speakers; front or rear and right or left.
When the distance between the vehicle
and the obstacle is less than approxi-
mately thirty centimetres, the audible
signal becomes continuous and/or the
"Danger" symbol appears, depending
on the multifunction screen version.
The parking sensor system cannot,
in any circumstances, replace the
need for vigilance and responsibility
on the part of the driver.
The parking sensors are switched off :
- when you exit reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than 6 mph
(10 km/h) in forward gear,
- when the vehicle has been stationary
for more than three seconds in
forward gear.
i
i
156
DRIVING
Deactivation Operating fault
The system will be deactivated au-
tomatically when a trailer is being
towed or when a bicycle carrier is
fi tted (vehicle fi tted with a towbar
or bicycle carrier recommended by
PEUGEOT).
Reactivation
Press button A , the warning lamp
comes on, the system is fully
deactivated.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered
with mud, ice or snow. When re-
verse gear is engaged, an audible
signal (long beep) indicates that
the sensors may be dirty.
When the vehicle is being driven at
a speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), certain sources of noise
(motorcycles, lorries, pneumatic
drills...) may trigger the parking sen-
sor audible signals.
If an operating fault occurs, this
warning lamp is displayed on
the instrument panel and/or a
message appears on the mul-
tifunction screen, accompanied by an
audible signal (short beep), when re-
verse gear is engaged.
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
Press button A again, the warning
lamp switches off, the system is
reactivated.
10
i
!
158
CHECKS
BONNET
Push the exterior safety catch B to
the left and raise the bonnet.
Unclip the stay C from its housing.
Fix the stay in the notch to hold the
bonnet open.
Closing
Take the stay out of the support
notch.
Clip the stay in its housing.
Lower the bonnet and release it at
the end of its travel.
Pull on the bonnet to check that it is
secured correctly.
Opening
Open the front left door.
Pull the interior bonnet release
lever A , located at the bottom of the
door frame.
The location of the interior bonnet
release lever prevents opening of
the bonnet while the front left door
is closed.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the bonnet
stay with care (risk of burns).
10
i i
159
CHECKS
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
(DIESEL)
If your vehicle is fi tted with an HDI en-
gine, the fuel circuit must be reprimed if
you run out of fuel.
This system consists of a priming pump,
a transparent pipe and a bleed screw
under the bonnet (refer to the corre-
sponding graphic).
1.6 litre Turbo HDI 16V engine
Fill the fuel tank with at least fi ve
litres of diesel.
Open the bonnet.
Unclip the style cover for access to
the repriming pump.
Squeeze and release thepriming
pump until fuel appears in the
transparent pipe with the green
connector.
Operate the starter until the engine
starts.
Put the style cover back in position
and clip it in place.
Close the bonnet.
2 litre Turbo HDI 16V engine
Fill the fuel tank with at least fi ve
litres of diesel.
Open the bonnet.
Unclip the style cover for access to
the priming pump.
Slacken the degas screw.
Squeeze and release the priming
pump until fuel appears in the
transparent pipe with the green
connector.
Retighten the bleed screw.
Operate the starter until the engine
starts.
Put the style cover back in position
and clip it in place.
Close the bonnet.
If the engine does not start at the
fi rst attempt, do not try again.
Operate the priming pump again,
then the starter.
If the engine does not start at the
fi rst attempt, do not try again.
Operate the priming pump again,
then the starter.
10
160
CHECKS
PETROL ENGINES
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fl uids and for replacing certain components.
1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash
reservoir.
3. Coolant reservoir.
4. Brake fl uid reservoir.
5. Battery/Fuses.
6. Fusebox.
7. Air fi lter * .
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil fi ller cap.
* According to engine.
10
161
CHECKS
DIESEL ENGINES
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fl uids, for replacing certain components and
for priming the fuel system.
1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash
reservoir.
3. Coolant reservoir.
4. Brake fl uid reservoir.
5. Battery/Fuses.
6. Fusebox.
7. Air fi lter * .
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil fi ller cap.
10. Priming pump * .
11. Bleed screw * .
* According to engine.
10
!
162
CHECKS
CHECKING LEVELS
Check all of these levels regularly and
top them up if necessary, unless other-
wise indicated.
If a level drops signifi cantly, have the
corresponding system checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Brake fluid level
In addition, as the cooling system is
pressurised, wait at least one hour after
switching off the engine before carrying
out any work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew
the cap by two turns to allow the pres-
sure to drop. When the pressure has
dropped, remove the cap and top up
the level.
Oil level
The reading will only be correct
if the vehicle is on level ground
and the engine has been off for
more than 15 minutes.
The check is carried out either
when the ignition is switched on using
the oil level indicator on the instrument
panel, or using the dipstick.
The brake fl uid level should be
close to the "MAX" mark. If it is
not, check the brake pad wear.
Changing the fl uid
Refer to the Warranty and Maintenance
Record for details of the interval for this
operation.
Power steering fluid level
The power steering fl uid level
should be close to the "MAX"
mark. Unscrew the cap, with the
engine cold, to check the level.
Screenwash and headlamp
wash fluid
In the case of vehicles fi tted with
headlamp washers, the mini-
mum level of this fl uid is indi-
cated by an audible signal and a
message on the multifunction screen.
Top up the level when you stop the ve-
hicle.
Engine oil change
Refer to the Warranty and Maintenance
Record for details of the interval for this
operation.
In order to maintain the reliability of the
engine and emission control system,
the use of additives in the engine oil is
prohibited.
Oil specifi cation
The oil must correspond to your engine
and conform to the manufacturer's re-
commendations.
Fluid specifi cation
The brake fl uid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations and
fulfi l the DOT4 standards.
Changing the coolant
The coolant does not have to be
changed.
Fluid specifi cation
For optimum cleaning and to avoid
freezing, this fl uid must not be topped
up with or replaced with water.
Coolant level
The coolant level should be
close to the "MAX" mark but
should never exceed it.
When the engine is warm, the tempera-
ture of the coolant is regulated by the fan.
This can operate with the ignition off.
On vehicles which are fi tted with a
particle emission fi lter, the fan may
operate after the vehicle has been
switched off, even if the engine is
cold.
Fluid specifi cation
The coolant must conform to the manu-
facturer's recommendations.
When working under the bonnet,
take care, as certain areas of the
engine may be extremely hot (risk
of burns).
10
!
i
163
CHECKS
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil
or fl uids with the skin.
Most of these fl uids are harmful to
health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fl uids
into sewers or onto the ground.
Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer
(France) or an authorised waste dis-
posal site.
Diesel additive level (Diesel
engine with particle emission
filter)
A low additive level is indicated by light-
ing of the service warning lamp, accom-
panied by an audible warning and a
message on the multifunction screen.
Used products
CHECKS
Unless otherwise indicated, check
these components in accordance with
the Warranty and Maintenance Record
and according to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Battery
The battery does not require
any maintenance.
However, check that the ter-
minals are clean and correctly
tightened, particularly in sum-
mer and winter.
When carrying out work on the battery,
refer to the "Practical information" sec-
tion for details of the precautions to be
taken before disconnecting the battery
and following its reconnection.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Refer to the Warranty and
Maintenance Record for de-
tails of the replacement inter-
vals for these components.
Depending on the environment
(e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of
the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace
them twice as often if necessary (refer
to the "Engines" paragraph).
A clogged passenger compartment fi lter
may have an adverse effect on the per-
formance of the air conditioning system
and generate undesirable odours.
Particle emission filter (Diesel)
It is imperative that the maintenance of
the particle emission fi lter is carried out
by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Oil filter
Replace the oil fi lter each time
the engine oil is changed.
Refer to the Warranty and
Maintenance Record for de-
tails of the replacement inter-
val for this component.
Following prolonged operation of
the vehicle at very low speed or at
idle, you may, in exceptional cir-
cumstances, notice the emission
of water vapour at the exhaust on
acceleration. This does not affect
the behaviour of the vehicle or the
environment.
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by a
PEUGEOT dealer without delay.
10
!
i
163
CHECKS
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil
or fl uids with the skin.
Most of these fl uids are harmful to
health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fl uids
into sewers or onto the ground.
Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer
(France) or an authorised waste dis-
posal site.
Diesel additive level (Diesel
engine with particle emission
filter)
A low additive level is indicated by light-
ing of the service warning lamp, accom-
panied by an audible warning and a
message on the multifunction screen.
Used products
CHECKS
Unless otherwise indicated, check
these components in accordance with
the Warranty and Maintenance Record
and according to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Battery
The battery does not require
any maintenance.
However, check that the ter-
minals are clean and correctly
tightened, particularly in sum-
mer and winter.
When carrying out work on the battery,
refer to the "Practical information" sec-
tion for details of the precautions to be
taken before disconnecting the battery
and following its reconnection.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Refer to the Warranty and
Maintenance Record for de-
tails of the replacement inter-
vals for these components.
Depending on the environment
(e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of
the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace
them twice as often if necessary (refer
to the "Engines" paragraph).
A clogged passenger compartment fi lter
may have an adverse effect on the per-
formance of the air conditioning system
and generate undesirable odours.
Particle emission filter (Diesel)
It is imperative that the maintenance of
the particle emission fi lter is carried out
by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Oil filter
Replace the oil fi lter each time
the engine oil is changed.
Refer to the Warranty and
Maintenance Record for de-
tails of the replacement inter-
val for this component.
Following prolonged operation of
the vehicle at very low speed or at
idle, you may, in exceptional cir-
cumstances, notice the emission
of water vapour at the exhaust on
acceleration. This does not affect
the behaviour of the vehicle or the
environment.
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by a
PEUGEOT dealer without delay.
10
!
164
CHECKS
Only use products recommended
by PEUGEOT or products of equiv-
alent quality and specifi cations.
In order to optimise the operation
of units as important as the braking
system, PEUGEOT selects and of-
fers very specifi c products.
To avoid damaging the electrical
units, the use of a high pressure
washer in the engine compartment
is strictly prohibited .
Brake disc wear
Brake pads
Parking brake
Brake wear depends on the
style of driving, particularly in
the case of vehicles used in
town, over short distances. It
may be necessary to have the
condition of the brakes checked, even
between vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a
drop in the brake fl uid level indicates
that the brake pads are worn.
For information relating to
checking the brake disc wear,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
If a loss of effectiveness of this
system is noticed, the parking
brake must be checked, even
between two services.
This system must be checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not re-
quire any maintenance (no oil
change).
Refer to the Warranty and
Maintenance Record for the
details of the level checking
interval for this component.
6-speed electronic gear control
gearbox
The gearbox does not re-
quire any maintenance (no oil
change).
Refer to the Warranty and
Maintenance Record for de-
tails of the checking interval for
this component.
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not re-
quire any maintenance (no oil
change).
Refer to the Warranty and
Maintenance Record for de-
tails of the level checking in-
terval for this component.
11
i
165
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
This repair kit is available from
PEUGEOT dealers.
It is designed to repair most punc-
tures which could affect the tyre, lo-
cated on the tyre tread or shoulder.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies
which have penetrated the tyre.
TEMPORARY
PUNCTURE REPAIR
KIT
The kit is stowed in the boot below the
fl oor. It is fi tted in the tool box, located
below the storage compartment.
Using the kit
This procedure, comprising several
steps, must be carried out in full.
Switch off the ignition.
Turn the selector A to the "SEALANT"
position.
Check that the switch B is in
position "0" .
Connect the white pipe C to the
valve of the tyre to be repaired.
Connect the compressor's electric
plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Affi x the speed limitation sticker
to the vehicle's steering wheel
to remind you that a wheel is in
temporary use.
Start the vehicle and leave the
engine running.
Access to the kit
Complete system consisting of a com-
pressor and an incorporated sealant
cartridge which permits temporary re-
pair of the tyre so that you can drive to
the nearest garage.
11
i
i
166
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the
pressure is not attained, this indi-
cates that the tyre is not repairable;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer for as-
sistance.
Switch on the compressor by moving
the switch B to position "1" until the
tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
Remove the kit, taking care to avoid
to avoid staining your vehicle with
traces of fl uid. Keep the kit to hand.
Drive immediately for approximately
three miles (fi ve kilometres), at
reduced speed (between 15 and
35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]), to plug
the puncture.
Stop to check the repair and the tyre
pressure using the kit.
Turn the selector A to the AIR
position.
Connect the black pipe D to the
valve of the wheel.
You can use this kit for the routine
check and adjustment of the tyre
pressures on your vehicle. It can
also be used to infl ate other items
such as a ball or bicycle tyre.
To do this, turn the selector to the
"AIR" position, connect the black
pipe with the appropriate adapter
to the item to be infl ated, then fol-
low the remainder of the procedure
below until the kit is removed.
11
i
!
!
167
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Tyre under-infl ation detection
If the vehicle is fi tted with tyre under-
infl ation detection, the under-infl ation
warning lamp will remain on after the
wheel has been repaired until the sys-
tem is reinitialised by a PEUGEOT
dealer.
Take care, this product is harmful
(e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony,
ethanediol...) if swallowed and
causes irritation to the eyes. Keep
it out of reach of children.
The expiry date of the fl uid is indi-
cated on the cartridge.
The sealant cartridge is designed
for single use; even if only partly
used, it must be replaced.
To remove the cartridge, unscrew it
completely at its cap and pull off.
After use, do not discard the car-
tridge into the environment, take
it to an authorised waste disposal
site or a PEUGEOT dealer.
Do not forget to obtain a new
sealant cartridge, available from
PEUGEOT dealers.
Connect the compressor's electric
plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle again and leave the
engine running.
Adjust the pressure using the
compressor (to infl ate: switch B in
position "1" ; to defl ate: switch B in
position "0" and press button E ), in
accordance with the vehicle's tyre
pressure label (located on the left
hand door aperture).
A loss of pressure indicates that the
puncture has not been fully plugged;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer for
assistance.
Remove and stow the kit.
Drive at reduced speed (50 mph
[80 km/h] max) limiting the distance
travelled to approximately 120 miles
(200 km).
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer as
soon as possible.
Have the tyre inspected by a
technician, who can then advise
you whether it can be repaired
or should be replaced.
11
i
168
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
This repair kit is available from
PEUGEOT dealers.
It is designed to repair holes of a
maximum diameter of 6 mm, locat-
ed exclusively on the tyre tread or
shoulder. Avoid removing any for-
eign bodies which have penetrated
the tyre.
TEMPORARY TYRE
REPAIR KIT
Complete system consisting of a compres-
sor and a bottle of sealant which permits
temporary repair of the tyre so that you
can drive to the nearest garage.
The kit is installed in the boot storage
tray.
Using the kit
Switch off the ignition.
Tick the wheel to be repaired on the
speed limitation sticker enclosed
then affi x the sticker to the vehicle's
steering wheel to remind you that a
wheel is in temporary use.
Clip the bottle 1 on the compressor 2 .
Check that the switch A is tilted to
position "0" .
Connect the pipe of the bottle 1 to
the valve of the tyre to be repaired.
Unwind the pipe of the compressor
2
fully, then connect it to the bottle.
Connect the compressor's electric
plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle and leave the
engine running.
11
i
169
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
If this pressure has not been
reached after approximately fi ve to
ten minutes, the tyre cannot be re-
paired; contact a PEUGEOT dealer
to have your vehicle repaired.
Switch on the compressor by tilting
the switch A to position "1" until the
tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
Remove the compressor and store
the bottle in the plastic bag, supplied
in the kit, to avoid staining your
vehicle with traces of fl uid.
Drive immediately for approximately
two miles (three kilometres), at
reduced speed (between 10 and
35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]), to fi ll the
puncture.
Stop to check the repair and the
pressure.
Connect the compressor pipe
directly to the valve of the repaired
wheel.
11
i
!
!
170
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
If the vehicle is fi tted with tyre under-
infl ation detection, the tyre under-
infl ation warning light will remain on
after the wheel has been repaired
until the system is reinitialised by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Take care, the bottle of fl uid con-
tains ethylene-glycol. This product
is harmful if swallowed and causes
irritation to the eyes. Keep it out of
reach of children.
The expiry date of the fl uid is indi-
cated on the base of the bottle.
The bottle is designed for a single
use; even if only partly used, it must
be replaced.
After use, do not discard the bottle
into the environment, take it to a
PEUGEOT dealer or to an organi-
sation responsible for its collec-
tion.
Do not forget to obtain a new bot-
tle of fi lling product, available from
PEUGEOT dealers.
Connect the compressor's electric
plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket
again.
Start the vehicle again and leave the
engine running.
Adjust the pressure using the
compressor (to infl ate: switch A in
position "1" ; to defl ate: switch A in
position "0" and press button B ),
in accordance with the vehicle's
tyre pressure label (located on the
door aperture on the driver's side),
then remember to check that the
leak is fi lled correctly (no further
loss of pressure after several miles
[kilometres]).
Remove the compressor, then store
the whole kit.
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer as
soon as possible to have the
tyre repaired or replaced by a
technician.
Drive at reduced speed (50 mph
[80 km/h] max) for no more than
approximately 125 miles (200 km).
11
i
171
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
CHANGING A WHEEL
The tools are installed in the boot under
the fl oor.
To gain access to them:
open the boot,
raise the fl oor,
secure it by hooking its cord on the
hook on the rear shelf support,
unclip and remove the box containing
the tools.
All of these tools are specifi c to your
vehicle. Do not use them for other
purposes.
1. Wheelbrace.
For removal of the wheel trim and
removal of the wheel fi xing bolts.
2. Jack with integral handle.
For raising the vehicle.
3. Socket for the security bolts
(located in the glove box).
For adaptation of the wheelbrace
to the special security bolts.
List of tools
Access to the tools
Wheel with trim
When removing the wheel , detach the trim fi rst using the wheelbrace 1 pulling
at the valve passage hole.
When refi tting the wheel , refi t the trim starting by placing its notch facing the
valve and press around its edge with the palm of your hand.
Procedure for changing a faulty wheel
for the spare wheel using the tools pro-
vided with the vehicle.
11
i
i
172
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Fixing the steel spare wheel
If your vehicle is fi tted with alloy
wheels, it is normal to notice, when
tightening the bolts on fi tting, that
the washers do not come into con-
tact with the steel spare wheel. The
wheel is secured by the conical
contact of each bolt.
Access to the spare wheel
The spare wheel is installed in the boot
under the fl oor.
According to country, the spare wheel
may be steel or alloy.
To gain access to it, refer to the paragraph
"Access to the tools" on the previous
page.
Taking out the wheel
Unscrew the yellow central bolt.
Raise the spare wheel towards you
from the rear.
Take the wheel out of the boot.
Putting the wheel back in place
Put the wheel back in its housing.
Unscrew the yellow central bolt by a
few turns then put it in place in the
centre of the wheel.
Tighten fully until the central bolt
clicks to retain the wheel correctly.
Put the box back in place in the
centre of the wheel and clip it.
Tyre under-infl ation detection
The spare wheel is not fi tted with
a sensor. The punctured wheel
must be repaired by a PEUGEOT
dealer.
11
i
173
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
CHANGING A WHEEL
Procedure for changing a
faulty wheel for the spare
wheel using the tools pro-
vided with the vehicle.
The wheelbrace 1 is installed in the boot
left-hand side trim.
The tools 2 and 3 are installed in a box,
in the centre of the spare wheel, placed
underneath the vehicle.
To gain access to them:
open the boot,
open the access fl ap in the left-hand
side trim,
remove the wheelbrace from its
support,
refer to the paragraph "Access to
the spare wheel" on the next page
to retrieve the other tools.
Access to the tools
List of tools
Wheel with trim
When removing the wheel , detach the trim fi rst using the wheelbrace 1 pulling
at the valve passage hole.
When refi tting the wheel , refi t the trim starting by placing its notch facing the
valve and press around its edge with the palm of your hand.
All of these tools are specifi c to your
vehicle. Do not use them for other pur-
poses.
1. Wheelbrace.
For removal of the wheel trim and
removal of the wheel fi xing bolts.
2. Jack with integral handle.
For raising the vehicle.
3. Socket for the security bolts
(located in the glove box).
For adaptation of the wheelbrace
to the special security bolts.
11
i
174
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Fixing the steel or "space-
saver" type spare wheel
If your vehicle is fi tted with alloy
wheels, it is normal to notice, when
tightening the bolts on fi tting, that
the washers do not come into con-
tact with the steel or "space-saver"
type spare wheel. The wheel is
secured by the conical contact of
each bolt.
Access to the spare wheel
The spare wheel is supported by a winch
system underneath the vehicle.
According to country, the spare wheel
may be steel, alloy or of the "space-
saver" type.
Taking out the wheel
Open the fl ap with the eye to release
the winch and access its control
nut.
Unscrew this nut fully, using the
wheelbrace 1 , to unwind the winch
cable.
Detach the wheel/box assembly
from the rear of the vehicle.
Take out the hook to release the
wheel/box assembly, as shown in
the illustration.
Take out the black plastic centring
cone.
Take out the wheel to gain access to
the box.
Slide the box cover to the centre
and remove it to gain access to the
other tools.
11
i i
175
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Tyre under-infl ation detection
The spare wheel is not fi tted with
a sensor. The punctured wheel
must be repaired by a PEUGEOT
dealer.
Putting the wheel back in place
Store the corresponding tools in the
box and close the cover.
Position the box on the ground and
centre the spare wheel on it.
Position the black plastic centring
cone (on the steel or "space-saver"
type wheel only).
Pass the hook into the box cover.
Raise the wheel/box assembly
underneath the vehicle by tightening
the winch control nut using the
wheelbrace 1 .
Tighten fully and check that the
wheel is horizontally fl ush against
the fl oor.
Close the fl ap with the eye to lock
the winch.
If you purchase a wheel of standard
size to replace the "space-saver"
type spare wheel, the spacer, lo-
cated underneath the vehicle, must
be removed. Consult a PEUGEOT
dealer.
11
i
176
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it
does not block traffi c: the ground
must be level, stable and non-slip-
pery ground.
Apply the parking brake, switch off
the ignition and engage fi rst gear *
to lock the wheels.
If necessary, place a chock under
the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be changed.
It is imperative that you ensure that
the occupants get out of the vehicle
and wait where they are safe.
Never go underneath a vehicle
raised using a jack; use an axle
stand.
Removing the wheel
List of operations
Fit the security socket 3 on the
wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security
bolt.
Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.
Place the jack 2 in contact with one
of the two front A or rear B locations
provided on the underbody, whichever
is closest to the wheel to be changed.
Extend the jack 2 until its base plate
is in contact with the ground. Ensure
that the centreline of the jack base
plate is directly below the location A
or B used.
Raise the vehicle until there is
suffi cient space between the wheel
and the ground to admit the spare
(not punctured) wheel easily.
Remove the bolts and store them in
a clean place.
Remove the wheel.
*
position R for the piloted manual
gearbox; P for the automatic gear-
box.
11
i
177
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
After changing a wheel
To store the punctured wheel in the
boot correctly, fi rst remove the cen-
tral cover.
When using the "space-saver" type
spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Have the tightening of the bolts and
the pressure of the spare wheel
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
without delay.
Have the punctured wheel repaired
and replace it on the vehicle as
soon as possible.
Fitting the wheel
List of operations
Put the wheel in place on the hub.
Screw in the bolts by hand to the
stop.
Pre-tighten the security bolt using
the wheelbrace 1 fi tted with the
security socket 3 .
Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.
Lower the vehicle fully.
Fold the jack 2 and detach it.
Tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 1 fi tted with the security
socket 3 .
Tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.
Store the tools in the box.
11
!
!
!
178
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs (D1S-35W) must be
replaced by a PEUGEOT dealer.
CHANGING A BULB
Procedure for replacing a faulty bulb with a
new bulb without the use of tools.
Model with halogen headlamps
1. Direction indicators
(PY 21W amber).
2. Dipped beam headlamps
(H7 - 55W).
3. Main beam headlamps (H1 - 55W).
4. Daytime running lamps/
sidelamps (P 21/ 5W ).
5. Foglamps (H8 - 35W).
1. Direction indicators
(PY 21W SV silver).
2. Directional dipped/main beam
headlamps (D1S-35W).
3. Additional main beam headlamps
(H1-55W).
4. Daytime running lamps/
sidelamps (P 21/5W).
5. Foglamps (H8-35W).
Model with xenon and directional
headlamps
The headlamps are fi tted with poly-
carbonate glass with a protective
coating:
do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
use a sponge and soapy water,
when using a high pressure
washer on persistent marks,
do not direct at the lamps or
their outlines for too long, so as
not to damage their protective
coating and seals.
Do not touch the bulb directly
with your fi ngers, use lint-free
cloths.
Changing a halogen bulb should
only be done after the headlamp
has been switched off for a few
minutes (risk of serious burns).
It is imperative to use only anti-ul-
traviolet (UV) type bulbs in order
not to damage the headlamp.
Front lamps
11
i
!
179
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing main beam headlamp
bulbs
Remove the protective cover by
pulling on the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Compress the springs to release the
bulb.
Remove the bulb and change it
To refi t, carry out these operations in re-
verse order.
Changing daytime running lamp/
sidelamp bulbs
Remove the protective cover by
pulling on the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a
turn and extract it.
Pull the bulb and change it.
To refi t, carry out these operations in re-
verse order.
Changing dipped beam headlamp
bulbs
Remove the protective cover by
pulling on the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Spread the springs to release the
bulb.
Extract the bulb and change it.
To refi t, carry out these operations in re-
verse order.
Changing direction indicator bulbs
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a
turn and extract it.
Pull the bulb and change it.
To refi t, carry out these operations in re-
verse order.
Amber or silver coloured bulbs,
such as the direction indicators,
must be replaced with bulbs of
identical specifi cations and colour.
When refi tting, close the protective
cover carefully to assure the seal-
ing of the headlamp.
11
180
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing foglamp bulbs
Insert a screwdriver towards the
centre of the repeater between the
repeater and the base of the mirror.
Tilt the screwdriver to extract the
repeater and remove it.
Disconnect the repeater connector.
To refi t, carry out these operations in re-
verse order.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer to obtain
replacement repeaters.
Changing integrated direction
indicator side repeaters
To replace these bulbs consult a
PEUGEOT dealer.
11
i
181
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Rear lamps
1. Brake lamps/ sidelamps ( P21 / 5W ).
2. Sidelamps ( P21 / 5W ).
3. Foglamp, left-hand side ( P21W ).
Reversing lamp, right-hand side
( P21W ).
4. Direction indicators ( P21W ).
Changing bulbs
These fi ve bulbs are changed from out-
side the boot:
remove the two lamp fi xing nuts,
extract the lamp carefully from the
outside,
disconnect the lamp connector,
press the four tabs and remove the
bulb holder,
turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and
change it.
To refi t, carry out these operations in re-
verse order.
If the vehicle is fi tted with the JBL
audio system, on the right-hand
side, fi rst remove the three fi xing
bolts, then move the box.
on the right-hand side; remove the
access fl ap,
on the left-hand side; turn the fi xing
bolt a quarter of a turn and remove
the storage box cover,
unclip the storage box,
11
182
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing third brake lamp bulbs
(4 bulbs W5W)
Unclip the tailgate upper trim from
left to right.
Unscrew the two lamp fi xing nuts A .
Unclip the lamp's central pin.
Extract the lamp from the outside.
Disconnect the bulb holder connector
and the wash-wipe pipe.
Unclip the bulb holder from the lamp
by pressing on the two tabs B .
Pull the bulb and change it.
To refi t, carry out these operations in re-
verse order.
Do not apply force to the lamp when
tightening the nuts.
Changing the number plate lamp
bulbs (W5W)
Insert a thin screwdriver into one of
the outer holes of the lens.
Push it outwards to unclip.
Remove the lens.
Pull the bulb and change it.
11
183
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Rear lamps
1. Brake lamps/ sidelamps ( P21 / 5W ).
2. Sidelamps ( P21 / 5W ).
3. Foglamp, left-hand side ( P21W )
Reversing lamp, right-hand side
( P21W ).
4. Direction indicators ( P21W )
Changing bulbs
These fi ve bulbs are changed from out-
side the boot:
unclip the lamp connector,
separate the fi ve tabs and remove
the bulb holder,
turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and
change it.
open the boot,
unscrew the two lamp fi xing bolts,
extract the lamp carefully pulling
it from the bottom and pivoting it
towards the outside,
To refi t, carry out these operations in re-
verse order.
Take care to engage the lamp in its
guides keeping it in line with the vehicle.
11
184
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Changing the number plate lamp
bulbs (W5W)
Insert a thin screwdriver into one of
the outer holes of the lens.
Push it outwards to unclip.
Remove the lens.
Pull the bulb and change it.
Changing the third brake lamp
(SW - diodes)
On the versions with opening rear
screen, for the replacement of this type
of diode lamp, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer.
Changing the third brake lamp
(SW - 4 bulbs W5W)
Remove the two lamp fi xing nuts A .
Take out the lamp from the outside.
Disconnect the connector and the
screenwash pipe from the lamp.
Turn the bulb holder corresponding
to the faulty bulb a quarter of a turn.
Pull the bulb and change it.
To refi t, carry out these operations in re-
verse order.
Do not force the lamp when tightening
the nuts.
11
!
i
185
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
PEUGEOT will not accept re-
sponsibility for the cost incurred in
repairing your vehicle or for recti-
fying malfunctions resulting from
the installation of accessories not
supplied and not recommended
by PEUGEOT and not installed in
accordance with its instructions,
in particular when the combined
consumption of all of the addition-
al equipment connected exceeds
10 milliamperes.
Installing electrical accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard
or optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your
vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
CHANGING A FUSE
Access to the tools
The extraction pliers and the spare fus-
es are installed on the back of the dash-
board fusebox cover.
To gain access to them:
turn the screw a quarter of a turn to
the left,
unclip the cover by pulling at the top
right,
remove the cover completely,
remove the pliers.
Changing a fuse
Before changing a fuse, the cause of
the failure must be identifi ed and recti-
fi ed.
Identify the faulty fuse by checking
the condition of its fi lament.
Use the special pliers to extract the
fuse from its housing.
Always replace the faulty fuse with a
fuse of the same rating.
Check the correspondence between
the number etched on the box, the
rating etched on the fuse and the
tables below.
Correct Incorrect
11
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Dashboard fuses
The fusebox is placed in the lower sec-
tion of the dashboard (left-hand side).
Access to the fuses
refer to the paragraph "Access to
the tools".
Fuse tables
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F1 15 A Rear wiper.
F2 30 A Locking and deadlocking earth.
F3 5 A Airbags and pretensioners control unit.
F4 10 A
Clutch pedal and dual-function brake switches,
electrochromatic rear view mirror, air conditioning,
steering wheel angle sensor, automatic gearbox,
switching and protection unit.
F5 30 A
Front one-touch electric windows, folding mirrors
supply, panoramic sunroof blind.
F6 30 A Rear one-touch electric windows, trailer fusebox.
F7 5 A
Front and rear courtesy lamps, map reading lamps,
rear reading lamps, sun visor illumination, glove box
illumination, torch.
F8 20 A
Audio equipment, audio/telephone, CD changer,
multifunction screen, tyre under-infl ation detection.
F9 30 A Front 12 V socket.
F10 15 A
Steering mounted controls, alarm siren, alarm
control unit.
F11 15 A Low current ignition switch.
11
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Fuse N° Rating Functions
G36 30 A Driver and passenger heated seats.
G37 5 A Driving position memory unit, lighting rheostat.
G38 30 A Driver's seat memory unit.
G39 30 A Trailer fusebox supply.
G40 30 A Hi-Fi amplifi er.
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F12 15 A
Instrument panel, seat belt and passenger's front airbag
warning lamps display, air conditioning, driver's seat
memory unit, 2nd row rear seat switches, driving school
module.
F13 5 A
Engine fusebox, airbags, electronic gear control
gearbox gear lever, trailer fusebox.
F14 15 A
Multifunction screen, amplifi er, Bluetooth system,
rain/brightness sensor, parking sensors control
unit.
F15 30 A Locking and deadlocking.
F17 40 A Rear screen and door mirrors demist/defrost.
SH - PARC shunt.
11
188
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Engine compartment fuses
The fusebox is placed in the engine
compartment near the battery (left-hand
side).
Access to the fuses
Unclip the cover.
Change the fuse (see corresponding
paragraph).
When you have fi nished, close the
cover carefully to ensure sealing of
the fusebox.
Fuse table
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F1 20 A
Engine control unit supply, injection pump and EGR
electrovalves (2 l HDI 16V), injectors (2 l HDI 16V).
F2 15 A Horn.
F3 10 A Front/rear wash-wipe.
F4 20 A Headlamp wash.
F5 15 A
Purge canister, turbine discharge and Turbo
pressure regulation electrovalves (1.6 l THP 16V),
oil vapour heater (1.6 l THP 16V), diesel heater
(1.6 l HDI 16V).
F6 10 A Vehicle speed sensor, ABS/ESP control unit.
F7 10 A
Power steering control unit, automatic gearbox,
engine coolant level detector.
F8 25 A Starter motor control.
F9 10 A
Diagnostic socket, directional headlamps, air
fl ow sensor (Diesel), particle emission fi lter pump
(Diesel).
F10 30 A
Engine control unit actuators (petrol: ignition
coils, electrovalves, oxygen sensors, injectors,
heaters, fuel pump, electronic thermostat) (Diesel:
electrovalves, heaters).
F11 40 A Air conditioning blower.
11
189
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F12 30 A Windscreen wipers slow/fast speed.
F13 40 A Built-in systems interface supply (ignition positive).
F14 30 A Air pump.
F15 10 A Right-hand main beam headlamp.
F16 10 A Left-hand main beam headlamp.
F17 15 A Left-hand dipped headlamp.
F18 15 A Right-hand dipped headlamp.
F19 15 A
Oil vapour heater (1.4 l 16V and 1,6 l VTi 16V),
canister purge electrovalve (1.4 l 16V and 1.6 l
VTi 16V), oxygen sensors (petrol), air cooling
electrovalves (Diesel).
F20 10 A
Electronic thermostat, variable timing solenoid
valves, Turbo pressure regulation electrovalve
(Diesel), engine coolant level detector (Diesel).
F21 5 A
Fan assembly relay supply, Valvetronic relay
control (1.4 l 16V and 1.6 l VTi 16V), Turbo cooling
(1.6 l THP 16V), air fl ow sensor (1.6 l HDI 16V).
11
190
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Table of mini and midi-fuses above the battery
Table of maxi-fuses
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F1 15 A Gearbox (electronic gear control or automatic).
F2 15 A Diagnostic socket, daytime running lamps.
F3 5 A Dual-function brake switch.
F4 - Not used.
F5 * 80 A Power steering electropump assembly.
F6 * 70 A Heating unit (Diesel).
F7 * 100 A Switching and protection unit.
F8 * - Not used.
F9 * 30 A Electronic gear control gearbox electropump assembly.
F10 * 30 A Valvetronic electric motor (1.6 l THP 16V).
Fuse N° Rating Functions
MF1 * 50 A Fan assembly.
MF2 * 50 A Dashboard fusebox.
MF3 * 80 A Built-in systems interface.
MF4 * - Not used.
MF5 * 50 A ABS/ESP control unit.
MF6 * 30 A ABS/ESP control unit.
MF7 * 80 A Built-in systems interface.
MF8 * - Not used.
* The midi-fuses and maxi-fuses pro-
vide additional protection for the
electrical systems. All work on these
types of fuse must be carried out by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
11
191
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Table of maxi-fuses **
Table of mini and midi-fuses above the battery **
* The midi-fuses and maxi-fuses provide
additional protection for the electrical sys-
tems. All work on these types of fuse must
be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer.
** During the year.
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F1 - Not used.
F2 5 A Dual-function brake switch.
F3 5 A Battery charge unit.
F4 25 A ABS/ESP electrovalves.
F5 - Not used.
F6 15 A Gearbox (electronic gear control or automatic).
F7 * 80 A Power steering electropump assembly.
F8 * 60 A Fan assembly.
F9 * 70 A/30 A
Pre-heat unit (Diesel)/Valvetronic electric motor
(1.6 l THP 16V).
F10 * 40 A ABS/ESP electropump assembly.
F11 * 100 A Switching and protection unit.
F12 * 30 A Electronic gear control gearbox electropump assembly.
Fuse N° Rating Functions
MF1 * - Not used.
MF2 * 30 A Trailer fusebox.
MF3 * 50 A Dashboard fusebox.
MF4 * 80 A Built-in systems interface.
MF5 * 80 A Built-in systems interface.
MF6 * - Not used.
MF7 * 30 A Heated seats.
MF8 * 20 A Headlamp wash.
11
i
192
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
BATTERY
Procedure for charging your battery
when it is fl at or for starting the engine
using another battery.
Access to the battery
Disconnecting/Reconnecting
the cables
Raise the locking plate 1 fully.
Position the open clip of the cable
on the positive terminal (+) of the
battery.
Press vertically on the clip 2 to
position it correctly against the
battery.
Lock the clip by lowering the plate 1 .
Starting using another battery
Do not force the plate as locking is
impossible if the clip is positioned
incorrectly.
Start the procedure again.
Connect the red cable to the positive
terminal (+) of the fl at battery A ,
then to the positive terminal (+) of
the slave battery B .
The battery is located under the bonnet.
To gain access to it:
open the bonnet using the interior
release lever, then the exterior
safety catch,
secure the bonnet stay,
remove the plastic cover to gain
access to the two terminals,
unclip the fuse box to remove the
battery, if necessary.
11
!
i
193
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Do not disconnect the terminals
while the engine is running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals fi rst.
Do not push the vehicle to start the
engine if it is fi tted with a 6-speed
electronic gear control gearbox.
The batteries contain harmful sub-
stances such as sulphuric acid and
lead. They must be disposed of in
accordance with regulations and
must not, in any circumstances, be
discarded with household waste.
Take used remote control batteries
and vehicle batteries to a special
collection point.
It is advisable to disconnect the
battery if the vehicle is to be left un-
used for more than one month.
Before disconnecting the
battery
Wait 2 minutes after switching off
the ignition before disconnecting
the battery.
Close the windows and the doors
before disconnecting the battery.
Following reconnection of the
battery
Following reconnection of the bat-
tery, switch on the ignition and wait
1 minute before starting to permit
initialisation of the electronic sys-
tems. However, if problems are en-
countered following this operation,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
Referring to the corresponding sec-
tion, you must yourself reinitialise:
- the remote control key,
- the panoramic sunroof blind,
- the GPS satellite navigation
system.
Charging the battery using a
battery charger
Disconnect the battery from the
vehicle.
Follow the instructions for use
provided by the manufacturer of the
charger.
Reconnect starting with the negative
terminal (-).
Check that the terminals and
connectors are clean. If they are
covered with sulphate (whitish or
greenish deposit), remove them and
clean them.
Connect one end of the green
or black cable to the negative
terminal (-) of the slave battery B .
Connect the other end of the green
or black cable to the earth point C
on the broken down vehicle.
Operate the starter, let the engine
run.
Wait until the engine returns to idle
and disconnect the cables.
11
!
i
194
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
A fl at battery prevents the engine
from starting (refer to the corre-
sponding paragraph).
If the telephone is being used at
this time:
- it will be maintained for
10 minutes with the hands-free
kit of your PC Sound,
- it will be maintained for 10 minutes
with the PC Nav or the PC Com
3D, then it will transfer to your
telephone depending on the
telephone model.
ENERGY ECONOMY MODE
System which manages the duration of
use of certain functions to conserve a
suffi cient level of charge in the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you can
still use functions such as the audio and
telematics system, windscreen wip-
ers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy
lamps, etc. for a maximum combined
duration of thirty minutes.
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated auto-
matically next time the vehicle is driven.
In order to resume the use of these
functions immediately, start the
engine and let it run:
- for less than ten minutes, to use
the equipment for approximately
fi ve minutes,
- for more than ten minutes, to
use the equipment for up to
approximately thirty minutes.
Switching to economy mode
Once the thirty minutes are over, a
message appears on the multi-function
screen indicating that the vehicle has
switched to economy mode and the active
functions are put on standby.
CHANGING A WIPER BLADE
Removing
Raise the corresponding wiper arm.
Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.
Fitting
Put the corresponding new wiper
blade in place and clip it.
Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
Before removing a front wiper
blade
Within one minute after switching off
the ignition, operate the wiper stalk
to position the wiper blades vertically
on the windscreen.
After fitting a front wiper blade
Switch on the ignition.
Operate the wiper stalk again to
park the wiper blades.
LOAD REDUCTION MODE
System which manages the use of cer-
tain functions according to the level of
charge remaining in the battery.
When the vehicle is being driven, the
load reduction function temporarily deac-
tivates certain functions, such as the air
conditioning, the heated rear screen...
The deactivated functions are reactivat-
ed automatically as soon as conditions
permit.
11
!i
195
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
TOWING THE VEHICLE
Access to the tools
Towing your vehicle
On the front bumper, unclip the
cover by pressing at the bottom.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
on the towed vehicle.
On the rear bumper, unclip the cover
by pressing at the bottom.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
on the towed vehicle.
Towing another vehicle
The towing eye is installed in the boot
under the fl oor.
To gain access to it:
open the boot,
raise the fl oor,
secure it by hooking its cord on the
hook on the shelf support,
remove the polystyrene storage
box,
remove the towing eye from the
holder.
When towing with all four wheels on
the ground, always use a towing bar.
When towing with only two wheels
on the ground, always use profes-
sional lifting equipment.
When towing with the engine off,
there is no longer any braking or
steering assistance.
Place the gear lever in neutral
(position N on the electronic
gear control gearbox or
automatic gearbox).
Failure to observe this special
condition could result in damage
to certain braking components
and the absence of braking
assistance the next time the
engine is started.
Procedure for having your vehicle towed
or for towing another vehicle using a re-
movable towing eye.
11
!i
196
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
TOWING THE VEHICLE
Procedure for having your
vehicle towed or for towing
another vehicle using a re-
movable towing eye.
Access to the tools
Towing your vehicle
On the front bumper, unclip the
cover by pressing it on the left.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
on the towed vehicle.
On the rear bumper, unclip the cover
by pressing it on the left.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
on the towed vehicle.
Towing another vehicle
The towing eye is installed in the left-
hand side trim of the boot.
To gain access to it:
open the boot,
open the access fl ap in the left-hand
side trim,
remove the wheelbrace from its
support,
remove the towing eye from the
same support.
When towing with all four wheels
on the ground, always use a tow-
ing bar.
When towing with only two wheels
on the ground, always use profes-
sional lifting equipment.
When towing with the engine off,
there is no longer any braking or
steering assistance.
Place the gear lever in neutral
(position N on the automatic
gearbox).
Failure to observe this special
condition could result in damage
to certain braking components
and the absence of braking
assistance the next time the
engine is started.
11
i
i
197
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
TOWING A TRAILER, A
CARAVAN, ETC.
Your vehicle is primarily designed for
transporting people and luggage, but it
may also be used for towing a trailer.
Driving advice
The maximum towing load on a long
slope depends on the gradient and the
ambient temperature.
In all cases, pay attention to the coolant
temperature.
Side wind
Take into account the increased
sensitivity to side wind.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases
the temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its
cooling capacity is not dependent on
the engine speed.
To lower the engine speed, reduce
your speed.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking
distance.
Tyres
Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Lighting
Check the electrical lighting and
signalling on the trailer.
The rear parking sensors will be de-
activated automatically if a genuine
PEUGEOT towbar is used.
If the warning lamp and the
STOP warning lamp come
on, stop the vehicle and
switch off the engine as
soon as possible.
Towbar suitable for the attachment of a
trailer or caravan with additional lighting
and signalling.
Distribution of loads
Distribute the load in the trailer so
that the heaviest items are as close
as possible to the axle and the nose
weight approaches the maximum
permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
reducing engine performance. Above
1 000 metres, the maximum towing load
must be reduced by 10 % and so on for
every 1 000 metres of altitude.
Refer to the "Technical Data" section for
details of the weights and towing loads
which apply to your vehicle.
Driving with a trailer subjects the towing
vehicle to more signifi cant stress and its
driver must be particularly careful.
We recommend the use of genuine
PEUGEOT towbars and their har-
nesses that have been tested and
approved from the design stage
of your vehicle, and that the fi t-
ting of the towbar is entrusted to a
PEUGEOT dealer.
If the trailer is not fi tted by a
PEUGEOT dealer, it is imperative
that it is fi tted using the electrical
pre-equipment installed at the rear
of the vehicle, in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
11
i i
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
FITTING ROOF BARS
Maximum authorised weight on the
roof rack, for a loading height not
exceeding 40 cm (with the excep-
tion of bicycle carriers): 80 kg.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt
the speed of the vehicle to the pro-
fi le of the road to avoid damaging
the roof bars and the fi xings on the
roof.
Be sure to refer to national legis-
lation in order to comply with the
regulations for transporting objects
which are longer than the vehicle.
FITTING ROOF BARS
When fi tting transverse
roof bars, ensure that they
are positioned correctly as
shown by marks under the
longitudinal roof bars.
Use accessories recommended by
PEUGEOT and follow the accessory
manufacturer's fi tting instructions.
In order to place a load on the roof,
transverse roof bars must be fi tted on
the longitudinal roof bars.
After putting the load in place and se-
curing it, retighten the transverse roof
bars.
The longitudinal roof bars cannot
be removed.
Maximum authorised weight on the
roof bars, for a loading height not
exceeding 40 cm (except bicycle
carriers): 75 kg.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt
the speed of the vehicle to the condi-
tion of the road, to avoid damaging
the roof bars and the fi xings on the
roof.
Be sure to refer to national legis-
lation in order to comply with the
regulations for transporting objects
which are longer than the vehicle.
When fi tting transverse roof bars, use
the four quick-fi t fi xings provided for this
purpose:
lift the concealing fl aps,
open the fi xing covers on each bar
using the spanner,
put each fi xing in place and lock
them on the roof one by one,
close the fi xing covers on each bar
using the spanner.
11
i
199
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
You can obtain a wide range of ac-
cessories and original parts from the
PEUGEOT network.
These accessories and parts have been
tested and approved for reliability and
safety.
They are all adapted to your vehicle and
benefi t from PEUGEOT's recommenda-
tion and warranty.
The product range offered by
PEUGEOT Accessories is structured
around 5 categories: PROTECTION -
TOURING - IN-CAR TECHNOLOGY -
STYLING - UNIVERSAL.
"Protection":
"Touring":
mats ** , boot tray, luggage
net, coat hook fi tted to head
restraints, aluminium or PVC
door sills.
anti-theft alarm, window en-
graving, wheel security locks,
breathalyzer, fi rst aid kit,
warning triangle, high vizibility
jacket, stolen vehicle tracking
system, dog guard, temporary
tyre repair kit, snow chains.
For leisure pursuits: roof bars, bicycle
carrier on towbar, bicycle carrier on roof
bars, ski carrier, roof box, booster seats
and child seats, side blinds and rear
blind, front centre armrest, CD storage,
under shelf storage.
Trailer towbar which must be fi tted by
the PEUGEOT network.
** To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
and secured correctly,
- never fi t one mat on top of another.
VERY COLD CLIMATE SCREEN *
Removable protective screen which
prevents the accumulation of snow at
the radiator cooling fan.
Fitting
Offer up the very cold climate screen
to the front of the lower section of
the front bumper.
Press around its edge to engage its
fi xing clips one by one.
Do not forget to remove the very
cold climate screen:
- when the ambient temperature
exceeds 10 °C,
- when towing,
-
at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Removal
Use a screwdriver as a lever to
release each fi xing clip in turn.
* According to country.
11
i
199
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
You can obtain a wide range of ac-
cessories and original parts from the
PEUGEOT network.
These accessories and parts have been
tested and approved for reliability and
safety.
They are all adapted to your vehicle and
benefi t from PEUGEOT's recommenda-
tion and warranty.
The product range offered by
PEUGEOT Accessories is structured
around 5 categories: PROTECTION -
TOURING - IN-CAR TECHNOLOGY -
STYLING - UNIVERSAL.
"Protection":
"Touring":
mats ** , boot tray, luggage
net, coat hook fi tted to head
restraints, aluminium or PVC
door sills.
anti-theft alarm, window en-
graving, wheel security locks,
breathalyzer, fi rst aid kit,
warning triangle, high vizibility
jacket, stolen vehicle tracking
system, dog guard, temporary
tyre repair kit, snow chains.
For leisure pursuits: roof bars, bicycle
carrier on towbar, bicycle carrier on roof
bars, ski carrier, roof box, booster seats
and child seats, side blinds and rear
blind, front centre armrest, CD storage,
under shelf storage.
Trailer towbar which must be fi tted by
the PEUGEOT network.
** To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
and secured correctly,
- never fi t one mat on top of another.
VERY COLD CLIMATE SCREEN *
Removable protective screen which
prevents the accumulation of snow at
the radiator cooling fan.
Fitting
Offer up the very cold climate screen
to the front of the lower section of
the front bumper.
Press around its edge to engage its
fi xing clips one by one.
Do not forget to remove the very
cold climate screen:
- when the ambient temperature
exceeds 10 °C,
- when towing,
-
at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Removal
Use a screwdriver as a lever to
release each fi xing clip in turn.
* According to country.
11
!
i
i
200
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
The fi tting of electrical equipment
or accessories which are not rec-
ommended by PEUGEOT may
result in a failure of your vehicle's
electronic system.
Please note this specifi c warning.
You are advised to contact a repre-
sentative of the Marque to be shown
the range of recommended equip-
ment and accessories.
Depending on the country in which
the vehicle is sold, it is compulsory
to have a high visibilty jacket, warn-
ing triangle and spare bulbs avail-
able in the vehicle.
"Styling":
"Universal":
You can obtain "Van" conversion kits to
transform a private vehicle into a van.
seat covers compatible with lat-
eral airbags, aluminium gear le-
ver knob, foglamps, sunroof *** ,
door defl ectors, spoiler, styling
strips, alloy wheels, trims, sport
exhaust, body kit.
screenwash, interior and exte-
rior maintenance and cleaning
products.
*** Sunroof which must be fi tted by the
PEUGEOT network.
"In-car technology":
audio systems, audio/tele-
phone, amplifi ers, satellite
navigation systems, Bluetooth
system, CD changer, speak-
ers, DVD player, connection
kit for MP3 player or portable
CD player, USB Box, rear
parking sensors.
Installation of
radiocommunication
transmitters
It is advisable to contact a repre-
sentative of the PEUGEOT marque
before installing accessory radio-
communication transmitters with
an external aerial on your vehicle.
The PEUGEOT network will pro-
vide you with the specifi cations
(frequency band, maximum out-
put power, aerial position, spe-
cial installation conditions) of the
transmitters which can be fi tted, in
accordance with the Vehicle Elec-
tromagnetic Compatibility Directive
(2004/104/CE).
12
201
TECHNICAL DATA
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
4C... 4A... 4G... 4E... 4H...
8FS-C 8FR-0 5FW-C 5FW-F
PETROL ENGINES
1.4 litre VTi 16V
95 hp
1.4 litre VTi 16V
98 hp
1.6 litre VTi 16V 120 hp
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 397 1 397 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 75 77 x 75 77 x 85.8
Max power: EU standard (kW) 70 72 88
Max power engine speed (rpm) 5 750 6 000 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 136 136 160
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 4 250 4 000 4 250
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes
GEARBOXES
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Auto.
(4-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with fi lter replacement) 4.25 - 4.25 4.25
Gearbox - Final drive 1.9 - 1.9 -
4C...: 5-door.
4A...: 3-door.
4G...: 3-door "Van".
4E...: SW with rear bench seat.
4H...: SW with panoramic sunroof.
12
202
TECHNICAL DATA
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
4C... 4A... 4E... 4H...
N6A-B
N6A-C
5FX-H 5FT-F 5FV-8 5FV-A
PETROL ENGINES
1.6 litre 16V
108 hp
1.6 litre THP
16V 150 hp
1.6 litre THP
16V 140 hp
1.6 litre THP 16V 156 hp
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 587 1 598 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 78.5 x 82 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8
Max power: EU standard (kW) 78 110 103 115
Max power engine speed (rpm) 5 800 5 800 6 000 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 142 240 240
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 4 000 1 400 1 400
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes
GEARBOXES
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Auto.
(4-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Auto.
(6-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with fi lter replacement) 3.25 4.25 4.25 - -
Gearbox - Final drive 1.9 1.9 - - -
4C...: 5-door.
4A...: 3-door.
4E...: SW with rear bench seat.
4H...: SW with panoramic sunroof.
12
203
TECHNICAL DATA
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
4C... 4A... 4E... 4H...
5FY-H
RFJ-B
RFJ-C
RFJ-E
RFJ-F
PETROL ENGINES
1.6 litre THP 16V 175 hp
2 litre 16V 140 hp
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8 85 x 88
Max power: EU standard (kW) 128 103
Mex power engine speed (rpm) 6 000 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 240 200
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 600 4 000
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter Yes Yes
GEARBOXES
Manual
(6-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Auto.
(4-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with fi lter replacement) 4.25 5 5
Gearbox - Final drive 1.9 1.9 -
4C...: 5-door.
4A...: 3-door.
4E...: SW with rear bench seat.
4H...: SW with panoramic sunroof.
12
204
TECHNICAL DATA
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
4C... 4A... 4E... 4H...
NFU-C/FF RFJ-C/FF
BIOFLEX ENGINES 1.6 litre 16V 110 hp 2 litre 16V 140 hp
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 587 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 78.5 x 82 85 x 88
Max power: EU standard (kW) 80 82 103 -
Max power engine speed (rpm) 5 800 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 147 153 200 -
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 4 000 4 000
Fuel Unleaded E85 Unleaded E85
Catalytic converter Yes Yes
GEARBOXES
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with fi lter replacement) 3.25 5.0
Gearbox - Final drive 1.9 1.9
4C...: 5-door.
4A...: 3-door.
4E...: SW with rear bench seat.
4H...: SW with panoramic sunroof.
12
TECHNICAL DATA
4C...: 5-door.
4A...: 3-door.
4G...: 3-door "Van".
4E...: SW with rear bench seat.
4H...: SW with panoramic sunroof.
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
4C... 4A... 4G... 4E... 4H...
9HX-B
9HX-C
9HV-C 9HP-0
DIESEL ENGINES 1.6 litre Turbo HDI 16V 90 hp
1.6 litre Turbo HDI 16V
92 hp
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3
Max power: EU standard (kW) 66 68
Max power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 4 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 215 230
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 750
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes
Particle emission fi lter No Yes Yes
GEARBOXES
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with fi lter replacement) 3.75 -
Gearbox - Final drive 1.9 -
12
215
TECHNICAL DATA
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
4C... 4A... 4E... 4H...
9HY-B 9HZ-C 9HZ-H 9HZ-H/P 9HR-8 9HR-8/P
DIESEL ENGINES 1.6 litre Turbo HDI 16V 110 hp
1.6 litre Turbo HDI 16V
112 hp
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3
Max power: EU standard (kW) 80 82
Max power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 3 600
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 240 270
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 750
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes
Particle emission fi lter No Yes Yes Yes Yes
GEARBOXES
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Electronic
gear control
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Electronic
gear control
(6-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with fi lter replacement) 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 - -
Gearbox - Final drive 1.9 1.9 1.9 - - -
4C...: 5-door.
4A...: 3-door.
4E...: SW with rear bench seat.
4H...: SW with panoramic sunroof.
12
216
TECHNICAL DATA
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
4C... 4A... 4E... 4H...
RHR-H RHR-J RHF-8 RHH-A
DIESEL ENGINES 2 litre Turbo H DI 16V 136 hp
2 litre Turbo HDI
16V 140 hp
2 litre Turbo HDI
16V 163 hp
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 997 1 997 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88 85 x 88 85 x 88
Max power: EU standard (kW) 100 103 120
Max power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 4 000 4 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 320 320 340
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 2 000 2 000 2 000
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes
Particle emission fi lter Yes Yes Yes
GEARBOXES
Manual
(6-speed)
Auto.
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Auto.
(6-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with fi lter replacement) 5.25 5.25 5.25 -
Gearbox - Final drive 2.4 - 2.4 -
4C...: 5-door.
4A...: 3-door.
4E...: SW with rear bench seat.
4H...: SW with panoramic sunroof.
12
205
TECHNICAL DATA
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Petrol engines
1.4 litre VTi 16V 95 hp 1.4 litre VTi 16V 98 hp
1.6 litre VTi 16V 120 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual Manual Auto.
Model codes:
4C... 4A... 4G...
8FS-C 8FR-0 5FW-C 5FW-F
- Unladen weight
1 271 - 1 262 - 1 246
1 271 - 1 263 1 287 - 1 277 1 312 - 1 302
- Kerb weight
1 346 - 1 337 - 1 321
1 346 - 1 338 1 362 - 1 352 1 387 - 1 377
- Payload 489 - 487 - 536 509 - 492 528 - 525 512 - 510
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
1 760 - 1 749 - 1 782
1 780 - 1 755 1 815 - 1 802 1 824 - 1 812
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
2 960 - 2 949 - 2 982
2 980 - 2 955 3 215 - 3 202 3 094 - 3 082
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 200 1 200 1 400 1 270
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 450 1 450 1 650 1 520
- Unbraked trailer 670 - 665 - 660 670 - 665 680 - 675 690 - 685
- Recommended nose weight 58 - 58 - 50 60 76 61
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
12
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Petrol engines
1.6 litre 16V
108 hp
1.6 litre THP
16V 150 hp
1.6 litre THP
16V 140 hp
1.6 litre THP 16V 156 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual Auto. Manual Auto.
Model codes:
4C... 4A...
N6A-B
N6A-C
5FX-H 5FT-F 5FV-8 5FV-A
- Unladen weight 1 302 - 1 279 1 340 - 1 316 1 355 - 1 343 1 315 - 1 300 1 368 - 1 345
- Kerb weight 1 377 - 1 354 1 415 - 1 391 1 430 - 1 418 1 390 - 1 375 1 443 - 1 420
- Payload 518 - 521 500 - 499 500 - 500 525 - 510 502 - 505
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 820 - 1 800 1 840 - 1 815 1 855 - 1 843 1 840 - 1 810 1 870 - 1 850
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 020 - 3 000 3 290 - 3 265 3 255 - 3 243 3 390 - 3 360 3 470 - 3 500
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 200 1 450 1 400 1 550 1 600
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 450 1 700 1 650 1 650 1 650
- Unbraked trailer 685 - 675 705 - 695 715 - 705 695 - 685 720 - 710
- Recommended nose weight 60 68 66 70 70
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
12
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Petrol engines
1.6 litre THP 16V
175 hp
2 litre 16V 140 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual Auto.
Model codes:
4C... 4A...
5FY-H
RFJ-B
RFJ-C
RFJ-E
RFJ-F
- Unladen weight 1 396 - 1 371 1 323 - 1 299 1 348 - 1 324
- Kerb weight 1 471 - 1 446 1 398 - 1 374 1 423 - 1 399
- Payload 459 - 464 502 - 501 502 - 501
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 855 - 1 835 1 825 - 1 800 1 850 - 1 825
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 255 - 3 235 3 225 - 3 200 3 250 - 3 225
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 400 1 400 1 400
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 650 1 650 1 650
- Unbraked trailer 735 - 720 695 - 685 710 - 695
- Recommended nose weight 66 70 70
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
12
208
TECHNICAL DATA
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
BioFlex engines 1.6 litre 16V 110 hp 2 litre 16V 140 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual
Model codes:
4C... 4A...
NFU-C/FF RFJ-C/FF
- Unladen weight 1 307 1 307 - 1 283
- Kerb weight 1 382 1 382 - 1 358
- Payload 447 447 - 447
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 754 1 754 - 1 730
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
2 954 3 154 - 3 130
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 200 1 400
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 450 1 650
- Unbraked trailer 690 690 - 675
- Recommended nose weight 60 66
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
12
209
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Petrol engines
1.4 litre VTi 16V
95 hp
1.6 litre VTi 16V 120 hp
1.6 litre 16V
108 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual Auto. Manual
Model codes: 4E... 8FS-C 5FW-C 5FW-F
N6A-B
N6A-C
- Unladen weight 1 351 1 362 1 388 1 374
- Kerb weight 1 426 1 437 1 463 1 449
- Payload 569 560 560 576
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 920 1 922 1 948 1 950
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
2 970 3 172 3 098 3 150
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 050 1 250 1 150 1 200
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 350 1 550 1 450 1 400
- Unbraked trailer 710 715 730 720
- Recommended nose weight 60 65 60 75
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
12
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Petrol engines
1.6 litre THP
16V 150 hp
1.6 litre THP
16V 140 hp
1.6 litre THP 16V 156 hp
BioFlex 2 litre
16V 140 hp
Gearboxes Manual Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Model codes: 4E... 5FX-H 5FT-F 5FV-8 5FV-A RFJ-C/FF
- Unladen weight 1 384 1 400 1 400 1 428 1 374
- Kerb weight 1 459 1 475 1 475 1 503 1 449
- Payload 560 560 540 537 561
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 944 1 960 1 940 1 965 1 935
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 394 3 160 3 390 3 515 3 285
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 450 1 200 1 450 1 550 1 350
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 700 1 500 1 600 1 550 1 550
- Unbraked trailer 725 735 735 750 720
- Recommended nose weight 70 60 65 65 75
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
12
211
TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Petrol engines 1.6 litre VTi 16V 120 hp
1.6 litre 16V
108 hp
1.6 litre THP
16V 150 hp
1.6 litre THP
16V 140 hp
Gearboxes Manual Auto. Manual Manual Auto.
Model codes: 4H... 5FW-C 5FW-F
N6A-B
N6A-C
5FX-H 5FT-F
- Unladen weight 1 440 1 466 1 462 1 486 1 502
- Kerb weight 1 515 1 541 1 537 1 561 1 577
- Payload 660 659 648 644 643
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 100 2 125 2 110 2 130 2 145
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 200 3 095 3 110 3 380 3 195
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 100 970 1 000 1 250 1 050
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 500 1 370 1 350 1 650 1 450
- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 60 55 75 70 60
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
12
212
TECHNICAL DATA
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Petrol engines 1.6 litre THP 16V 156 hp
1.6 litre THP 16V
175 hp
Gearboxes Manual Auto. Manual
Model codes: 4H... 5FV-8 5FV-A 5FY-H
- Unladen weight 1 481 1 509 1 524
- Kerb weight 1 556 1 584 1 599
- Payload 649 651 606
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 130 2 160 2 130
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 380 3 510 3 380
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 250 1 350 1 250
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 400 1 350 1 650
- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 60 60 70
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
12
TECHNICAL DATA
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Petrol engines 2 litre 16V 140 hp
BioFlex 2 litre 16V 140 hp
Gearboxes Manual Auto. Manual
Model codes: 4H...
RFJ-B
RFJ-C
RFJ-E
RFJ-F
RFJ-C/FF
- Unladen weight 1 461 1 486 1 471
- Kerb weight 1 536 1 561 1 546
- Payload 659 654 634
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 120 2 140 2 105
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 320 3 340 3 305
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 200 1 200 1 200
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 550 1 550 1 550
- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 75 75 75
12
217
TECHNICAL DATA
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Diesel engines 1.6 litre Turbo HDI 16V 90 hp
1.6 litre Turbo
HDI 16V 92 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual
Model codes:
4C... 4A... 4G...
9HX-B 9HX-C 9HV-C 9HP-0
- Unladen weight -
1 303 - 1 293 - 1 278
1 311 - 1 301 1 303 - 1 288
- Kerb weight -
1 378 - 1 368 - 1 353
1 386 - 1 376 1 378 - 1 363
- Payload - 501 - 499 - 530 502 - 498 512 - 502
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) -
1 804 - 1 792 - 1 808
1 813 - 1 799 1 815 - 1 790
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
-
3 074 - 3 062 - 3 078
3 083 - 3 069 2 915 - 2 890
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
- 1 270 1 270 1 100
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
- 1 520 1 520 1 300
- Unbraked trailer - 685 - 680 - 675 690 - 685 685 - 680
- Recommended nose weight - 61 - 61 - 55 61 60
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
12
218
TECHNICAL DATA
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Diesel engines 1.6 litre Turbo HDI 16V 110 hp
Gearboxes Manual
Electronic gear control
Model codes:
4C... 4A...
9HY-B 9HZ-C 9HZ-H 9HZ-H/P
- Unladen weight 1 331 - 1 307 1 322 - 1 312 1 337 - 1 313 1 334 - 1 324
- Kerb weight 1 406 - 1 382 1 397 - 1 387 1 412 - 1 388 1 409 - 1 399
- Payload 514 - 513 528 - 525 523 - 522 527 - 525
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 845 - 1 820 1 850 - 1 837 1 860 - 1 835 1 861 - 1 849
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 115 - 3 090 3 120 - 3 107 3 130 - 3 105 3 131 - 3 119
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 270 1 270 1 270 1 270
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 520 1 520 1 520 1 520
- Unbraked trailer 700 - 690 695 - 690 705 - 690 700 - 695
- Recommended nose weight 65 61 61 61
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
12
TECHNICAL DATA
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Diesel engines 1.6 litre Turbo HDI 16V 112 hp
Gearboxes Manual Electronic gear control
Model codes:
4C... 4A...
9HR-8 9HR-8/P
- Unladen weight 1 318 - 1 303 1 319 - 1 304
- Kerb weight 1 393 - 1 378 1 394 - 1 379
- Payload 542 - 532 541 - 536
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 860 - 1 835 1 860 - 1 840
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 110 - 3 085 3 110 - 3 090
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 250 1 250
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 500 1 500
- Unbraked trailer 695 - 685 695 - 685
- Recommended nose weight 60 60
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
12
220
TECHNICAL DATA
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Diesel engines 2 litre Turbo HDI 16V 136 hp
2 litre Turbo HDI
16V 140 hp
2 litre Turbo HDI
16V 163 hp
Gearboxes Manual Auto. Manual Auto.
Model codes:
4C... 4A...
RHR-H RHR-J RHF-8 RHH-A
- Unladen weight 1 421 - 1 408 1 447 - 1 434 1 421 - 1 408 1 428 - 1 401
- Kerb weight 1 496 - 1 483 1 522 - 1 509 1 496 - 1 483 1 503 - 1 476
- Payload 500 - 502 500 - 501 500 - 502 532 - 534
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 921 - 1 910 1 947 - 1 935 1 921 - 1 910 1 960 - 1 935
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 621 - 3 610 3 597 - 3 585 3 621 - 3 610 3 460 - 3 435
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 700 1 650 1 700 1 500
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 700 1 650 1 700 1 500
- Unbraked trailer 745 - 740 750 - 750 745 - 740 750 - 735
- Recommended nose weight 68 66 68 66
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
12
221
TECHNICAL DATA
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Diesel engines 1.6 litre Turbo HDI 16V 90 hp
1.6 litre Turbo
HDI 16V 110 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual
Model codes:
4E...
9HX-B 9HX-C 9HV-C 9HZ-H
- Unladen weight 1 391 1 378 1 392 1 407
- Kerb weight 1 466 1 453 1 467 1 482
- Payload 579 570 578 560
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 970 1 948 1 970 1 967
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 170 3 148 3 170 3 167
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 200 1 200 1 200 1 200
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 400 1 500 1 500 1 500
- Unbraked trailer 730 725 730 740
- Recommended nose weight 75 60 60 60
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
12
222
TECHNICAL DATA
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Diesel engines 1.6 litre Turbo HDI 16V 112 hp
2 litre Turbo HDI
16V 136 hp
2 litre Turbo HDI
16V 140 hp
Gearboxes Manual
Electronic gear control
Manual Manual
Model codes:
4E...
9HR-8 9HR-8/P RHR-H RHF-8
- Unladen weight 1 410 1 413 1 473 1 473
- Kerb weight 1 485 1 488 1 548 1 548
- Payload 560 562 560 560
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 970 1 975 2 033 2 033
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 120 3 125 3 583 3 583
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 150 1 150 1 550 1 550
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 400 1 300 1 700 1 700
- Unbraked trailer 740 740 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 60 60 70 70
12
223
TECHNICAL DATA
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Diesel engines
1.6 litre Turbo
HDI 16V 90 hp
1.6 litre Turbo
HDI 16V 110 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual
Model codes:
4H...
9HX-B 9HX-C 9HZ-C 9HZ-H
- Unladen weight 1 480 1 467 1 486 1 495
- Kerb weight 1 555 1 542 1 561 1 570
- Payload 640 633 654 655
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 120 2 100 2 140 2 150
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 120 3 100 3 140 3 150
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 350 1 400 1 400 1 400
- Unbraked trailer 750 750 740 750
- Recommended nose weight 75 60 75 60
12
224
TECHNICAL DATA
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Diesel engines 2 litre Turbo HDI 16V 136 hp
2 litre Turbo HDI
16V 140 hp
2 litre Turbo HDI
16V 163 hp
Gearboxes Manual Auto. Manual Auto.
Model codes:
4H...
RHR-H RHR-J RHF-8 RHH-A
- Unladen weight 1 575 1 600 1 575 1 603
- Kerb weight 1 650 1 675 1 650 1 678
- Payload 640 640 640 642
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 215 2 240 2 215 2 245
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 615 3 640 3 615 3 445
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 400 1 400 1 400 1 200
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer
within the GTW limit)
1 650 1 650 1 650 1 200
- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 70 70 70 56
12
225
TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS (IN MM)
308 saloon (3 and 5 door versions)
*
** 5-door.
308 SW
12
i
226
TECHNICAL DATA
IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS
Various visible markings for the identifi -
cation and tracking of your vehicle.
If the tyre pressures are too low,
this increases fuel consumption.
The tyre pressures must be
checked when the tyres are cold,
at least once a month.
A. Vehicle Identifi cation Number
(VIN) under the bonnet.
This number is engraved on the
bodywork near the damper support.
To gain access to it, raise the plastic
cover.
B. VIN on the windscreen lower
crossmember.
This number is indicated on a self-
adhesive label which is visible
through the windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's plate.
This plate is riveted onto the engine
mounting.
or
D. Manufacturer's label.
This number is indicated on a self-
destroying label affi xed to the right
hand centre pillar.
This plate/label also indicates the
kerb weight, the gross vehicle
weight (GVW) and the gross train
weight (GTW).
E. Tyre/paint label.
This label is affi xed to the front pillar,
on the driver's side.
It bears the following information:
- the tyre infl ation pressures with and
without load,
- the wheel rim and tyre sizes,
- the brands of tyre recommended by
the manufacturer,
- the infl ation pressure of the spare
wheel,
- the paint colour code.
228
EMERGENCY CALL
ASSISTANCE CALL
OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
In an emergency, press this button for more than
2 seconds. Flashing of the green diode and a voice
message confi rm that the call has been made to the
PEUGEOT Emergency team * .
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green
diode switches off.
The green diode remains on (without fl ashing) when communication is
established. It switches off at the end of communication.
This call is dealt with by the PEUGEOT Emergency team which receives
locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the
appropriate emergency services. In countries in which the team is not
operational, or when the locating service has been expressly refused,
the call is dealt with directly by the emergency services (112) without the
vehicle location.
If an impact is detected by the airbag ECU, and independently of any
triggering of the airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.
* This service is subject to conditions and availability.
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request
assistance if the vehicle breaks down.
A voice message confi rms that the call has been made * .
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.
The cancellation is confi rmed by a voice message.
When the ignition is switched on, the green
indicator lamp comes on for 3 seconds
indicating that the system is operating
correctly.
If the orange indicator lamp fl ashes: there is
a system malfunction.
If the orange indicator lamp is lit continuously:
the backup battery must be replaced.
In both cases, consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
229
PEUGEOT ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER CALL
Press this button for access to PEUGEOT services * .
Select "Customer call" to request
any information about the PEUGEOT
marque.
Select "PEUGEOT Assistance" to
make a breakdown assistance call.
* These services and options are subject to conditions and availability.
EMERGENCY CALL
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL using PC Com 3D
ASSISTANCE CALL
In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audible
signal is heard and a "Confi rmation/Cancellation"
screen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted).
A call is made * to the PEUGEOT Emergency
team which receives locating information from the
vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the relevant
emergency services.
In countries in which the team is not operational, or
when the locating service has been expressly rejected,
the call is sent to the emergency services (112).
* This service is subject to conditions and availability. Consult a PEUGEOT
dealer.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and in
and independently
of the triggering of any airbags, an emergency call is ma
l is made
automatically.
The message "Deteriorated emergency call" associated with fl ashing
The message "Deteriorated emergency call" associated with fl ashing
of the orange indicator lamp indicates a malfunction. Co
n. Consult a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Warning - the emergency call and the services are only a
only active
if the internal telephone is used with a valid SIM card. W
rd. With a
Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these servi
services are not
operational.
231
The PC Com 3D is protected in such a way that it
will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed
in another vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer for
confi guration of the system.
Certain functions described in this handbook will become
available during the course of the year.
PC Com 3D
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO EQUIPMENT/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
GPS EUROPE
CONTENTS
01 First steps p. 232
02 General operation p. 234
03 Navigation - Guidance p. 238
04 Traffi c information p. 246
05 Radio p. 248
06 Music media players p. 249
07 Making a telephone call p. 254
08 Confi guration p. 258
09
Voice commands and steering
mounted controls
p. 259
10 Screen menu map p. 262
Frequently asked questions p. 266
For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver carries
out operations which require prolonged attention while
the vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the PC Com 3D switches off
following the activation of the Energy Economy mode.
232
01
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV ESC TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
1
10
2
3
4
6
12
9
7
8
11
5
TUPQRS
0
*
1.
CD eject.
2.
RADIO: access to the "Radio" Menu.
Display the list of stations in alphabetical order
(FM waveband) or frequency order (AM waveband).
MEDIA: access to the "Media" Menu (Audio CD,
Jukebox, External Device).
Display the list of tracks. Change of source.
NAV: access to the "Navigation" Menu and display of the
last destinations.
ESC: abandon the operation in progress.
Long press: return to the main display.
TRAFFIC: access to the "Traffi c" Menu (function
described in detail in sections 02 and 10).
ADDR BOOK: access to the "Address book" Menu
(function described in detail in section 10).
SETUP: access to the "SETUP" Menu (confi guration)
(function described in detail in sections 02 and 10).
Long press: GPS coverage.
3.
Audio settings (Balance/Fader, Bass/Treble,
Musical Ambience...).
4.
Volume adjustment (each source is independent, including
message and navigation alert)
Long press: reinitialisation of the system.
Short press: mute.
5.
Automatic search for a radio station on a lower frequency.
Selection of the previous CD or MP3 track.
FIRST STEPS
PC Com 3D CONTROL PANEL
6.
Automatic search for a radio station on a higher frequency.
Selection of the next CD or MP3 track.
7.
Normal display or black screen.
8.
Selection of the successive display on the screen of "MAP"/
"NAV" (if navigation is in progress)/"TEL" (if a conversation is in
progress)/"RADIO" or "MEDIA" currently being played.
9.
PICK UP: access to the "Phone" menu.
With Bluetooth connection, accept an incoming call.
10.
HANG UP: access to the "Phone" menu.
Hang up the current call or refuse an incoming call, with
Bluetooth connection.
11.
Entering of numbers or letters on the alpha-numeric keypad,
pre-selection of 10 radio frequencies.
12.
SD card reader.
Short press: clears the last
character.
Long press: activates voice
recognition.
233
01
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
13
14
13.
OK: confi rmation of the highlighted item on the screen.
- 4-direction navigator: press to the left/right.
When the "RADIO" screen is displayed: selection of the
previous/next frequency.
When "MEDIA" is displayed: selection of the previous/next
track.
When "MAP" or "NAV" is displayed: horizontal movement of
the map.
- 4-direction navigator: press up/down.
When "RADIO" is displayed: selection of the previous/next
radio station on the list.
When the "MEDIA" screen is displayed: selection of the MP3
directory.
When "MAP" or "NAV" is displayed: vertical movement of the
map.
Switch to the next or previous page of a menu.
Movement on the virtual keypad displayed.
FIRST STEPS
PC Com 3D NAVIGATOR
14.
Rotation of the ring:
When the "RADIO" screen is displayed: selection of the
previous/next radio station on the list.
When the "MEDIA" screen is displayed: selection of the
previous/next CD or MP3 track.
When "MAP" or "NAV" is displayed: front/rear map zoom.
Movement of the menu selection curser.
234
02
SETUP
MEDIA
TRAFFIC
GENERAL OPERATION
For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the "Screen
menu map" section of this handbook.
Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following displays:
Long press: access to the GPS coverage and to the demonstration mode.
For maintenance of the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional product.
RADIO/ MUSIC MEDIA/VIDEO
TELEPHONE
(If a conversation is in progress)
FULL SCREEN MAP
NAVIGATION
(If guidance is in progress)
SETUP:
access to the "SETUP" Menu: system language * and
voice functions * , voice initialisation (section 09), date
and time * , display, unit and system parameters.
TRAFFIC:
access to the Traffi c Menu: display of the current
traffi c alerts.
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT
MEDIA:
"DVD-audio" menu
"DVD-Video" menu
* Available according to model.
235
02
1
2
3
3
2
1
1
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
GENERAL OPERATION
Pressing OK gives access to short-cut
menus according to the display on the
screen.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:
TA
PLAY OPTIONS
NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN PROGRESS):
ABORT GUIDANCE
REPEAT ADVICE
BLOCK ROAD
UNBLOCK
MORE
LESS
CALCULATE
ZOOM/SCROLL
BROWSE ROUTE
ROUTE INFO
SHOW DESTINATION
TRIP INFO
Route type
RADIO:
IN FM MODE
TA
RDS
RADIOTEXT
REGIONAL PROG.
AM
IN AM MODE
TA
REFRESH AM LIST
FM
TELEPHONE:
END CALL
HOLD CALL
DIAL
DTMF-TONES
PRIVATE MODE
MICRO OFF
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT
Avoid
Satellites
Stopovers
BROWSE ROUTE
ZOOM/SCROLL
VOICE ADVICE
ROUTE OPTIONS
ROUTE TYPE
ROUTE DYNAMICS
AVOIDANCE CRITERIA
RECALCULATE
NORMAL ORDER
RANDOM TRACK
SCAN
SELECT MEDIA
236
02
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
3
3
3
3
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
3
1
2
2
3
3
3
GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT
FULL SCREEN MAP:
ABORT GUIDANCE/RESUME GUIDANCE
SET DESTINATION/ADD STOPOVER
POIS NEARBY
POSITION INFO
OPTIONS
Navigate to
Dial
Save position
Zoom/Scroll
MAP SETTINGS
2D MAP
2.5D MAP
3D MAP
NORTH UP
HEADING UP
ZOOM/SCROLL
AUDIO DVD (LONG PRESS):
STOP
GROUP
Group 1.2/n
PLAY OPTIONS
Normal order/Random track/Scan
TA
SELECT MEDIA
DVD OPTIONS
Audio
Subtitles
Angle
Examples:
VIDEO DVD (LONG PRESS):
PLAY
STOP
DVD MENUS
DVD menu
DVD top menu
List of titles
List of chapters
237
- the map setting which allows the map to be displayed fl at, in perspective or in 3D.
- confi guration of the system by means of voice commands.
Map in 3D
Flat map
Map in perspective
PC Com 3D IS:
238
NAV
03
1
2
3
6
5
4
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SELECTING A DESTINATION
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the "Destination input" function
and press OK to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Select the letters of the town one
by one confi rming each time by
pressing OK.
Once the country has been selected,
turn the ring and select the town
function. Press OK to confi rm.
NAVIGATION MENU
DESTINATION INPUT
A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the
A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the
country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on
tton on the virtual
keypad.
Select the "Address input" function
and press OK to confi rm.
ADDRESS INPUT
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Na
the Navigation
Menu function.
The "NAVIGATION" voice commands are listed in section 09.
During guidance, a long press on the end of the lighting stalk repeats the last guidance
instruction.
239
7
8
10
9
11
03
Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street"
and "House number" functions.
To delete a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choo
Choose from last
destinations".
A long press on one of the destinations displays a list o
list of actions from
which you can select:
Select the "Save to address book" function to record th
ord the address
entered in a directory fi le. Press OK to confi rm the selection.
entered in a directory fi le. Press OK to confi rm the selection.
The PC Com 3D permits the recording of more than 4 0
an 4 000 contact
fi les.
To speed up the process, the post code can be entered
tered directly after
selecting the "Postal code" function.
Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.
Select the route type:
"Fast route", "Short route", or
"Optimized route" and press OK to
confi rm.
Then select "Start route guidance"
and the press OK to confi rm.
It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose fro
se from address
book" or "Choose from last destinations", by selecting a
ting a junction, a
town centre, geographic coordinates, or directly on the "
n the "Map".
CHOOSE FROM ADDRESS BOOK
CHOOSE FROM LAST D
ST DESTINATIONS
START ROUTE GUIDANCE
It is possible to scroll the map using the 4-direction navigator. It is possible to select
its orientation via the short-cut menu of the "Full screen map". Press OK then select
"Map Settings" and confi rm.
Select the road with the colour
corresponding to the route chosen
and press OK to confi rm and start
guidance.
Turn the ring and select OK.
Press OK to confi rm.
DELETE ENTRY
DELETE LIS
TE LIST
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
240
NAV
03
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
ROUTE OPTIONS
Select the "Route dynamics" function.
This function provides access to the
"Traffi c independent", "Semi-dynamic"
and "Dynamic" options.
Select the "Avoidance criteria"
function. This function provides
access to the "Avoid" options
(motorways, toll roads, ferries,
tunnels).
Turn the ring and select the
"Recalculate" function to take into
account the route options selected.
Press OK to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the "Route type" function and
press OK to confi rm. This function
allows you to change the route type.
Select the "Route options" function
and press OK to confi rm.
NAVIGATION MENU
ROUTE OPTIONS
ROUTE TYPE
ROUTE DYNAMICS
AVOIDANCE CRITERIA
RECALCULATE
When the map is displayed on the screen, you can select "Map Settings" then "2D Map/2.5D Map/
3D Map/North Up/Heading Up". The display of buildings in 3D mode depends on the progress in
town mapping.
241
NAV
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
8
03
ADDING A STOPOVER
Enter a new address, for example.
Once the new address has been
entered, select "Start route guidance"
and press OK to confi rm.
Position the stopover on the list and
press OK to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the "Navigation" Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the "Add stopover" function
(5 stopovers maximum) and press OK
to confi rm.
Select the "Stopovers" function and
press OK to confi rm.
STOPOVERS
ADDRESS INPUT
"NAVIGATION" MENU
ADD STOPOVER
START ROUTE GUIDANCE
To change the stopovers, repeat operations 1 to 3 and s
and select
"Rearrange route" (select a stopover, delete it or move i
ove it on the list
using the ring to change the order, confi rm its new position and fi nish
using the ring to change the order, confi rm its new position and fi nish
with "Recalculate").
Stopovers can be added to or deleted from the route once the destination has been selected.
Repeat operations 1 to 7 as many times as necessary then select
"Recalculate" and press OK to confi rm.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
242
NAV
03
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST
(POI)
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the "POI nearby" function to
search for POIs around the vehicle.
Select the "POI search" function and
press OK to confi rm.
NAVIGATION MENU
POI SEARCH
POI NEARBY
Select the "POI in city" function to
search for POIs in the city required.
Select the country then enter the name
of the city using the virtual keypad.
Select the "POI near route" function to
search for POIs near the route.
Select the "POI in country" function
to search for POIs in the country
required.
Select the "POI near destination"
function to search for POIs near the
point of arrival of the route.
POI NEAR DESTINATION
POI IN COUNTRY
POI NEAR ROUTE
A list of cities present in the country selected can be acc
be accessed via
the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
POI IN CITY
The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various
businesses, airports...).
243
03
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)
POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)
* According to availability in the country.
This icon appears when several POIs
are grouped together in the same area.
Zooming in on this icon shows details of
the POIs.
244
03
5
6
3
4
2
NAV
1
Download the "Risk areas POIs" update fi le onto an
SD card or USB stick from the Internet. This service is
available on www.peugeot.fr or www.peugeot.co.uk.
The fi les must be copied to the root on the chosen medium.
The fi les must be copied to the root on the chosen medium.
Insert the medium (SD card or USB stick) containing
the POI database into the system's SD card reader or
USB reader.
Successful downloading is confi rmed by a message.
The system restarts.
UPDATING THE RISK AREAS POIs
Select the medium ("USB" or
"SD-Card") used and press OK.
Press NAV, select Navigation Menu,
then "Settings", then "Update
personal POI".
SETTINGS
NAVIGATION MENU
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
The Risk Areas POIs version is available on the SETUP
ETUP\
System menu.
UPDATE PERSONAL POI
245
03
5
3
4
NAV
1
2
1
SPOKEN INSTRUCTION SETTINGS
Select "Set parameters for risk areas"
to gain access to the "Display on
map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert"
functions.
Select the "POI categories on Map"
function to select the POIs to be
displayed on the map by default.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the "Settings" function and
press OK to confi rm.
NAVIGATION MENU
SETTINGS
POI CATEGORIES ON MAP
SET PARAMETERS FOR RISK AREAS
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
When the navigation is displayed on
the screen, press OK then select or
deselect "Voice advice" to activate
or deactivate the spoken guidance
instructions.
Use the volume button to adjust the
volume.
POINTS OF INTEREST AND
RISK AREAS SETTINGS
The volume of the Risk Areas POIs alert can only be adj
be adjusted during
this type of alert.
246
TRAFFIC
04
1
2
4
5
3
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND
DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES
When all of the messages on the route are selected, the addition
of a geographic fi lter is recommended (within a radius of 3 miles
(5 km) for example) to reduce the number of messages displayed
on the map. The geographic fi lter follows the movement of the
vehicle.
The fi lters are independent and their results are concealed.
We recommend:
- a fi lter over 6 miles (10 km) around the vehicle in heavy traffi c,
- a fi lter over 30 miles (50 km) around the vehicle or a fi lter on the
route on motorway journeys.
Press the TRAFFIC button again or
select the Traffi c Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select "Geo. Filter".
The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffi c Menu sorted in
The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffi c Menu sorted in
order of proximity.
Select the fi lter of your choice:
MESSAGES ON ROUTE
ONLY WARNING MESSAGES
ALL WARNINGS ON ROUTE
ALL MESSAGES
TRAFFIC MENU
Select "Select preferred list"
MESSAGE FILTERING and press OK
to confi rm.
The TMC (Traffi c Message Channel) messages provide information relating to traffi c and weather
conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the driver audibly and visually on the navigation map.
The guidance system can then suggest an alternative route.
Press the TRAFFIC button.
GEO. FILTER
247
04
2
1
3
2
1
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS
Red and yellow triangle: traffi c information, for example:
Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
With the current audio source
displayed on the screen, press the
dial.
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:
Select Traffi c Announcements (TA)
and press the dial to confi rm and go
to the associated settings.
TA
The TA (Traffi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio
station transmitting this type of message. When a traffi c report is
transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, Jukebox, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
248
RADIO
1
1
2
3
05
SELECTING A STATION
When the current radio station is
displayed on the screen, press OK.
The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides
ovides access to
the following short-cuts:
Select the function required and press
OK to confi rm to gain access to the
corresponding settings.
TA
The RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to th
g to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. How
s. However, in
certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be a
ot be assured
throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 %
100 % of the
territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station dur
ion during a journey.
The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the
reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the way
in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio
equipment.
RDS - REGIONAL MODE
REGIONAL PROG.
RADIOTEXT
RDS
Press the RADIO button to display
the list of stations received locally
sorted in alphabetical order.
Select the station required by turning
the ring and press to confi rm.
Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for mo
or more than
2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep confi rms that it
2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep confi rms that it
has been stored.
Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the sto
the stored radio
station.
AM
RADIO
When the "RADIO" screen is displayed, turn the
ring or use the 4-direction navigator to select the
previous or next station on the list.
While listening to the radio, press buttons
and
for the automatic search for a lower or higher
frequency.
249
06
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3/WMA CD,
MP3/WMA SD CARD/USB READER
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, w
RW, when
recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1,
vel 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be pla
t be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is
ard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet st
oliet standard is
recommended.
The audio equipment will only play audio fi les with the extension
The audio equipment will only play audio fi les with the extension
".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps a
bps and the
extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 3
s and 384 Kbps.
It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of fi le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 A
2.5 Audio Layer 3
and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Medi
Media Audio and
the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standa
standards which
permit the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
permit the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
Connecting an IPod:
To play MP3 type fi les, connect the IPod using the USB port
To play MP3 type fi les, connect the IPod using the USB port
(limited functions).
To play ITunes fi les, connect the IPod using the auxiliary socket
To play ITunes fi les, connect the IPod using the auxiliary socket
(AUX).
In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be forma
formatted
to FAT 32.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using of
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using of
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying
problems.
During play, exit the "SD-Card" or "USB" source before
efore removing the
SD card or the USB memory stick from its reader.
To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card or the US
the USB memory
stick when you leave your vehicle with the roof open.
INFORMATION AND ADVICE
250
4
5
6
2
7
3
1
MEDIA
06
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV ESC TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
SELECTING/PLAYING
CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/
USB READER
The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend
The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend
on the recording programme and/or the parameters used. We
on the recording programme and/or the parameters used. We
recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.
Press the MEDIA button.
Select the "Select media" function
and press OK to confi rm.
Press this button.
Select the music source required.
Press OK to confi rm. Play begins.
SELECT MEDIA
"MEDIA" MENU
Press the MEDIA button again or
select the "Media" Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
When the "MEDIA" screen is
displayed, turn the ring up or down to
select the previous or next compatible
source.
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA fi les appears under "Media" Menu.
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA fi les appears under "Media" Menu.
Insert the audio or MP3 CD in the player,
the SD card in the card reader or the USB
peripheral in the USB reader. Play begins
automatically.
MP3 CDs, SD cards or USB peripherals are the compatible sources.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
251
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV ESC TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MEDIA
06
Select "Jukebox management" then
"Add fi les"and press OK at each step
to confi rm.
Press the MEDIA button. Press the
MEDIA button again or select Media
Menu and press OK to confi rm.
Insert an audio/MP3 CD, a USB
memory stick or an SD card.
JUKEBOX
ADD FILES
Check that the active MEDIA source is that of the mediu
medium used
(CD, USB or SD card).
Select "Add fi les from MP3-Disc" for
example and press OK to validate.
Select the tracks required then
"Rip selection" or select all of the
tracks using "Rip all".
Select "[New folder]" to create a new
folder or select an existing folder
(created previously).
ADD FILES FROM MP3-DISC
[NEW FOLDER]
"Do you want to change the names of
the tracks that will be ripped?": select
"Yes" to change them or "No".
To copy an MP3 CD, then select
"Real time ripping", "Fast ripping"/
"High quality (192 kbit/sec)" or
"Standard quality (128 kbit/sec)" then
select "Start ripping".
Confi rm the warning message by
pressing "OK" to start the copy.
OK
YES
NO
When copying is in progress, switching off the ignition will interrupt the process but it will resume
directly when the ignition is switched on again.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
COPYING A CD, A USB STICK OR
AN SD CARD ONTO THE HARD DISK
252
3
3
2
2
MEDIA
3
3
4
4
5
5
2
2
MEDIA
1
1
1
06
Press the MEDIA button.
Press the MEDIA button again or
select Media Menu and press OK to
confi rm.
Select "Jukebox management" and
press OK to confi rm.
Select "Play options" and press OK
to confi rm.
Select "Folders & Files" or "Playlists"
then press OK to confi rm.
Press the ESC button to return to the fi rst fi le level.
Playlists can be created in the Jukebox.
Media Menu> Jukebox management> Create new playlist. Add the
tracks required one by one then save the change. The "Playlists"
play mode must then be selected.
JUKEBOX
LISTENING TO THE JUKEBOX
JUKEBOX MANAGEMENT
MODIFY CONTENT
Press the MEDIA button.
Press the MEDIA button again or
select Media Menu and press OK to
confi rm.
Select "Jukebox management" and
press OK to confi rm.
Select "Modify content" and press OK
confi rm.
JUKEBOX
RENAMING OR DELETING AN ALBUM
Activate the playing of a source other than the Jukebox
(CD, radio, etc...).
Check that the active source is not the Jukebox in order
order to be able to
rename or delete a track/folder.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
253
1
3
4
2
2
3
MEDIA
1
MEDIA
06
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV ESC TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
Connect the portable equipment (MP3 player, camcorder, camera…)
Connect the portable equipment (MP3 player, camcorder, camera…)
to the RCA socket (white and red for audio; red and yellow for video)
to the RCA socket (white and red for audio; red and yellow for video)
in the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.
Press the MEDIA button then press
it again or select the "Media" Menu
function and press OK to confi rm.
Select the AUX music source and
press OK to confi rm. Play begins
automatically.
Select "Select media" then
"External device (AV)" and press OK
to activate it.
EXTERNAL DEVICE
The display and management of the controls is via the p
a the portable
equipment.
USING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX)
AUDIO/VIDEO/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED
If the external device is not activated, select "Ext. Device (Aux)
If the external device is not activated, select "Ext. Device (Aux)
management" to activate it.
VIEWING A VIDEO DVD
Select the video source required ("DVD-Video", "Extern
xternal device
(AV)"). Press OK to confi rm. Play begins.
Press the MEDIA button to gain
access to the DVD menu at any time,
or to the functions of the Media Menu
which adjust the video (brightness/
contrast, image format...).
If the DVD does not appear on the
screen, press the MODE button to
gain access to the "MEDIA" screen
which displays the DVD screen.
Insert the DVD in the player. Play begins
automatically.
The 4-direction navigator and the chromed ring allow you to move
the DVD selection cursor. Change chapter by pressing the
or
button.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
254
07
1
2
CHOOSING BETWEEN THE BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE/INTERNAL TELEPHONE
To activate the Bluetooth telephone
or the internal telephone, press PICK
UP TEL.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Select Phone menu, then "Select
phone" then choose between
"Telephone off", "Use Bluetooth
phone" or "Use internal phone".
Press OK at each step to confi rm.
The system can only be connected to one Bluetooth tele
th telephone and
one SIM card (Internal telephone) at the same time.
In this case, the phone book is synchronised with the Bl
the Bluetooth
telephone.
255
07
1
3
5
4
2
1
* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility
of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check which
services you have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is
available from dealers.
USING THE TELEPHONE
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged
onged attention on
the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Blue
Bluetooth mobile
telephone to the hands-free system of the PC Com 3D
m 3D must be
carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on
ition on.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.
The last telephone connected is reconnected
automatically.
If no telephone is connected, the
system prompts you to "Connect
phone". Select "Yes" and press OK to
confi rm.
Enter the authentication code on the
telephone. The code to be entered is
displayed on the screen.
To change the telephone connected,
press the TEL button, then select
Phone menu, then "Select phone"
then "Connect Bluetooth phone"
then select the telephone required or
"Search phone".
Press OK at each step to confi rm.
Once the telephone has been connected, the PC Com 3
Com 3D can
synchronise the address book and the call list. This sync
is synchronisation
may take a few minutes * .
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears on
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears on
the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required
uired then select
"Connect phone" for a new connection. Select "Delete p
elete pairing" to
cancel the connection to the telephone.
Press the TEL button.
For a fi rst connection, select
"Search phone" and press OK to
confi rm. Then select the name of the
telephone.
SEARCH PHONE
256
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
07
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
Extract the holder by pressing the eject button.
Install the SIM card in the holder
and then insert it in the slot.
To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1.
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the SIM card installation operations must
be carried out when stationary.
Enter the PIN code on the keypad
then select OK and confi rm.
The system asks "Do you want to
switch to the internal phone?", select
"Yes" if you wish to use your SIM card
for your personal calls. Otherwise,
only the emergency call and the
services will use the SIM card.
REMEMBER PIN
When entering your PIN code, tick the "Remember PIN" tab to allow
use of the telephone without having to enter this code when it is
used subsequently.
USING THE INTERNAL TELEPHONE
WITH SIM CARD
USING THE TELEPHONE
Once the SIM card has been installed, the system can synchronise
the address book and the call list.
This synchronisation may take a few minutes.
If you have declined to use the internal telephone for personal calls, you can still connect a Bluetooth
telephone to receive your calls on the vehicle's audio system.
257
3
1 1
2
3
2
07
Press the end of the steering mounted control to
accept the call or end the call in progress.
Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No"
to refuse and confi rm by pressing OK.
RECEIVING A CALL
MAKING A CALL
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimp
perimposed display
on the screen.
To hang up, press the HANG UP TEL
button or press OK and select "End
call" then confi rm by pressing OK.
END CALL
Press the PICK UP TEL button.
Press the end of the steering mounted control for more
more than
two seconds to open the address book.
It is also possible to select a number from the address b
ress book. You
can select "Dial from address book". The PC Com 3D p
3D permits the
recording of up to 4 096 entries.
DIAL NUMBER
Select "Dial number", then dial the
telephone number using the virtual
keypad.
"PHONE" MENU
Select the "Phone" menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
YES
NO
The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the veh
he vehicle appears
under "Phone" menu. You can select a number and pres
d press OK to
make the call.
The PICK UP TEL button accepts, the HANG UP TEL button refuses
the incoming call.
USING THE TELEPHONE
258
5
6
SETUP
1
2
3
4
08
CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
Set the parameters using the ring
and move on to the next using the
4-direction navigator.
Press OK to confi rm.
Select the "Date format" function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the format required using the
ring and press OK to confi rm.
Select the "Set date & time" function
and press OK to confi rm.
Pressing the SETUP button for more than 2 seconds pe
ds permits
access to:
This setting operation must be carried out if the battery h
ttery has been
disconnected.
Press the SETUP button.
Select the "Time format" function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the format required using the
ring and press OK to confi rm.
SET DATE & TIME
Select the "Date & Time" function and
press OK to confi rm.
DEMO MODE
GPS COVERAGE
DESCRIPTION OF THE UNIT
DATE & TIME
Principle of the GPS synchro (GMT):
1. Confi rm the "Synchronise with GPS" selection, the time is then set to GMT universal time, the date
is also updated.
2. Using the 4-direction navigator, move the cursor to the time fi elds and press OK.
3. You can then use the ring to set the time to the time zone of your choice.
Take care when changing between summer/winter time, the time zone must be changed again
manually.
This function provides access to the options in the SETUP menu.
259
09
RADIO: selection of the previous stored station.
Audio CD: selection of the previous track.
If "MEDIA" is displayed on the screen:
MP3 CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: selection of the
previous directory.
Selection of the previous entry in the address book.
RADIO: selection of the next stored station.
Audio CD: selection of the next track.
If "MEDIA" is displayed on the screen:
MP3 CD/CARD/JUKEBOX: selection of the next
directory.
Selection of the next entry in the address book.
RADIO: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: selection of the next track.
CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: continuous press: fast forward play.
RADIO: automatic search for a lower frequency.
CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: selection of the previous track.
CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: continuous press: fast backward play.
- Change the sound source.
- Make a call from the address book.
- Pick up/Hang up the telephone.
- Press for more than 2 seconds:
access to the address book.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
Mute: by pressing
the volume increase
and decrease buttons
simultaneously.
Restore the sound: by
pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
Wiper stalk: display of "RADIO" and "MEDIA".
Lighting stalk: activation of the voice command by means of a short press; indication of the current
navigation instruction by means of a long press.
260
TUPQRS
0
*
1
1
SETUP
2
2
09
Before using the system for the fi rst time, you are advised to
listen to, say and repeat the instructions for use.
Press the SETUP button and
select the "Language & Speech"
function. Turn the ring and select
"Voice control". Activate the voice
recognition.
Select "Tutorial".
VOICE COMMANDS -
VOICE RECO. INITIATION
The phrases to be spoken according to the context are
indicated in the tables below.
Speak and PC Com 3D acts.
Long press on this button or press on the
end of the lighting stalk: activates the voice
recognition.
CONTEXT
SAY
ACTION
GENERAL
Help address book
Help voice control
Help media
Help navigation
Help telephone
Help radio
Cancel
Correction
Access to the address book help
Access to the voice reco help
Access to the media management help
Access to the guidance, navigation help
Access to the telephone help
Access to the radio help
To cancel a voice command which is in
progress
Request to correct the last voice
recognition carried out
Clear
RADIO
Select station
Station <tts:stationName>
Read out station list
Enter frequency
Select wave band
AM
FM
TA on
TA off
Select a radio station
Select a radio station using its RDS
description <tts:station Name> from the
RADIO list
Listen to the list of stations available
Listen to the frequency of the current
radio station
Choose the frequency waveband (AM
or FM)
Change the frequency waveband to AM
Change the frequency waveband to FM
Activate the Traffi c Info (TA)
Deactivate the Traffi c Info
NAVIGATION
Destination input
Voice advice off
Voice advice on
Save address
Start guidance
Abort guidance
Navigate entry
POI Search
Command to enter a new destination
address
Deactivate the spoken guidance
instructions
Activate the spoken guidance instructions
Save an address in the address book
Start guidance (once the address has
been entered)
Stop the guidance
Start guidance to a fi le in the address
book
Start guidance to a point of interest
VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
261
09
VOICE RECO. INITIATION
VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
CONTEXT
SAY
ACTION
MEDIA
Media
Select media
Single slot
Jukebox
USB
External device
SD-Card
Track <1 - 1 000>
Folder <1 - 1 000>
Select the MEDIA source
Choose a source
Select the CD player source
Select the Jukebox source
Select the USB reader source
Select the audio AUX input source
Select the SD card source
Select a specifi c track (number between 1 and
1 000) on the active MEDIUM
Select a Folder (number between 1 and 1 000)
on the active MEDIUM
TELEPHONE
Phone menu
Enter number
Phone book
Dial
Save number
Accept
Reject
Open the Telephone Menu
Enter a telephone number to be called
Open the phone book
Make a call
Save a number in the phone book
Accept an incoming call
Refuse an incoming call
ADDRESS BOOK
Address book menu
Call <entry>
Navigate <entry>
Open the address book
Call fi le using its description <fi le> as described
in the address book
Start guidance to an address in the address book
using its description <fi le>
262
10
MEDIA
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
3
3
1
2
3
3
2
4
4
4
4
4
2
3
3
2
2
4
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
3
3
2
3
3
3
TRAFFIC
MAIN FUNCTION
CHOICE A
choice A1
choice A2
CHOICE B...
SCREEN MENU MAP
"MEDIA" MENU
"TRAFFIC" MENU
SELECT PREFERRED LIST
Messages on route
Only warnings on route
All warning messages
All messages
Geo. Filter
Deactivate PIN
Within 2 miles (3 km)
Within 3 miles (5 km)
Within 6 miles (10 km)
Within 30 miles (50 km)
SELECT MEDIA
Audio CD/MP3-Disc/ DVD-Audio /DVD-Video
Jukebox (Folders & Files)
SD-Card
USB
External device (audio/AV)
VIDEO SETTINGS
Aspect ratio
Menu language
Display
Brightness
Contrast
Colour
AUX standard
Reset video settings
READ OUT SETTINGS
On confi rmation
Incoming messages
TMC STATION INFORMATION
JUKEBOX MANAGEMENT
Add fi les
Create folder
Modify content
Edit playlist
Play options
Folders & Files
Playlists
Memory capacity
SOUND SETTINGS
Refer to the " Sound settings " menu details of which
are shown on the next page.
EXT. DEVICE (AUX) MANAGEMENT
Off/Audio/Audio and Video (AV)
263
1
2
3
3
3
2
RADIO
1
2
3
3
2
2
3
NAV
1
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
3
4
2
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
ROUTE OPTIONS
Route type
POI near destination
Short route
STOPOVERS
Add stopover
Address input
Navigate HOME
Choose from address book
Choose from last destinations
Rearrange route
Replace stopover
Delete stopover
Recalculate
Fast route
Short route
Optimized route
SOUND SETTINGS
Refer to the " Sound settings " menu below.
BALANCE/FADER
POI SEARCH
POI nearby
POI near destination
POI in city
POI in country
POI near route
"RADIO" MENU
WAVEBAND
FM
AM
MANUAL TUNE
"NAVIGATION" MENU
ABORT GUIDANCE/RESUME GUIDANCE
"SOUND SETTINGS" MENU
BASS/TREBLE
EQUALIZER
Linear
Classic
Jazz
Rock/Pop
Techno
Vocal
MUTE REAR SPEAKERS
LOUDNESS
SPEED DEPENDENT VOLUME
RESET SOUND SETTINGS
DESTINATION INPUT
Address input
Country
City
Street
House number
Start route guidance
Postal code
Save to address book
Intersection
City district
Geo position
MAP
Navigate HOME
Choose from last destinations
Choose from address book
264
3
3
2
4
4
4
4
4
ADDR
BOOK
4
3
4
4
4
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
2
2
2
3
2
5
3
3
5
5
5
5
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
SETTINGS
Route dynamics
Traffi c independent
Semi-dynamic
Dynamic
Avoidance criteria
Avoid motorways
Avoid toll roads
Avoid tunnels
Avoid ferries
Recalculate
"ADDRESS BOOK" MENU
Optimized route
Subscr. service
"PHONE" MENU
DIAL NUMBER
Automatically accept call
Signal waiting call (?)
Show status
Activate waiting call
Deactivate waiting call
Call forward (?)
Show status
Activate call forward
Deactivate call forward
Suppress own number
Select network
Set network automatically
Set network manually
Search for networks
PIN settings
Change PIN
Activate PIN
Deactivate PIN
Remember PIN
SIM-card memory status
CREATE NEW ENTRY
SHOW MEMORY STATUS
EXPORT ADDRESS BOOK
DELETE ALL VOICE ENTRIES
DELETE ALL ENTRIES
DELETE FOLDER "MY ADDRESSES"
DIAL FROM ADDRESS BOOK
CALL LISTS
MESSAGES
SELECT PHONE
Telephone off
Use Bluetooth phone
Use internal phone
Connect Bluetooth phone
Search phone
Disconnect phone
Rename phone
Delete pairing
Delete all pairings
Show details
SETTINGS
Automatic answering system
Select ring tone
Phone/Ring tone volume
Enter mailbox number
Internal phone settings
265
SETUP
1
2
3
4
3
4
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
4
4
4
4
2
4
3
2
4
4
3
4
4
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
4
4
5
5
5
4
5
5
3
"SETUP" MENU
LANGUAGE & SPEECH
Menu language
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
Italiano
Nederlands
Polski
Portuguese
Voice control
Voice control active
Tutorial
Basics
Examples
Tips
Speaker adaptation
New speaker adaptation
Delete speaker adaptation
Voice output volume
DATE & TIME
Set date & time
Date format
Time format
DISPLAY
Brightness
Colour
Steel
blue light (only in day mode)
Orange Ray
Blue Flame
MAP colour
Day mode for MAP
Night mode for MAP
Auto. Day/Night for MAP
UNITS
Temperature
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Metric/Imperial
km
Miles
SYSTEM
Factory reset
Software version
Automatic scrolling
266
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "Linear"
and set the loudness correction to the "Active"
position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position
in radio mode.
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to inadequate quality, certain recorded
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio
data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
The CD player sound
is poor.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the PC Com 3D.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
267
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...)
An incorrect waveband is selected.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the
stored stations do
not function (no
sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
Press RADIO, select Radio Menu then
"Waveband" to return to the waveband on which
the stations are stored.
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or
there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle
is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
Sound cut-outs of 1
to 2 seconds in radio
mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu if the phenomenon is too frequent
and always on the same route.
With the engine off, the
system switches off after
a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on
the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a failure of the audio equipment.
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
268
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The "TA" box is ticked.
However, certain traffi c
jams along the route
are not indicated in real
time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the
traffi c information.
Wait until the traffi c information is being received
correctly (displaying of the traffi c information
symbols on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the
traffi c information.
The time taken to
calculate a route
sometimes seems
longer than usual.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the traffi c information available.
The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/DVD
is being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being
calculated.
Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stop
the copying before starting the guidance function.
Does the emergency call
function work without a
SIM card?
No, as certain national regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in
order to make an emergency call.
Insert a valid SIM card in the slot.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely.
Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button,
then select "GPS coverage").
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the
conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the conditions of reception of the
GPS signal.
I receive a speed
camera alert for a speed
camera which is not on
my route.
The speed camera
audible warning does
not work.
The system announces all speed cameras positioned in a cone located
in front of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras located on nearby or
parallel roads.
The audible warning is not active.
The alert volume is set to minimum.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
the speed camera.
Activate the audible warning on Navigation Menu,
Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
Increase the volume of the alert when passing a
speed camera.
269
SOLUTION
There is a long waiting
period following the
insertion of a CD.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of
data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.
This phenomenon is normal.
I cannot connect my
Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipment
may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function
is switched on.
- Check that your telephone is visible.
QUESTION
ANSWER
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.
A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones
is available from the dealer network.
The system does not
play the DVD.
The region protection may not be compatible.
Insert DVDs which have compatible region
protection.
I cannot copy the CD to
the Jukebox.
The wrong source is selected.
Change the active source to CD.
The CD is copy-protected.
It is normal that a protected CD cannot be copied.
The route calculation is
not successful.
The exclusion criteria may confl ict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a toll motorway).
Check the exclusion criteria on the Navigation
Menu ("Route options" - "Avoidance criteria").
The volume of the
telephone connected in
Bluetooth mode is inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.
Increase the volume of the PC Nav, to maximum
if required, and increase the volume of the
telephone if necessary.
270
The system does not
receive SMS.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending of the SMS to the system.
Use your SIM card and the internal telephone.
The SIM card used is a twin card.
Use the original SIM card to receive the SMS.
I cannot update the
hazardous location
POIs.
The Navigation Menu - "Update personal POI" is not displayed.
Check that the medium used for the update
(SD card or USB stick) is inserted correctly.
An error message is displayed at the end of the procedure.
- Start the procedure again in full.
- Consult a PEUGEOT dealer if the problem
persists.
- Check that the data on the MEDIUM is
supplied by an offi cial partner of PEUGEOT.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The voice frequencies
(DTMF) are not
active when I am
communicating and I
press numbers on the
keypad.
The numeric buttons on the keypad are only active for calls if the display is
in telephone mode.
To activate them, press the MODE button until
the telephone is displayed on the screen.
An accident area which
does not concern me is
displayed on the screen.
The accident areas are displayed near a point defi ned on the map and in
relation to a direction of travel.
The alert may be triggered when travelling under
a road or near a road which has a speed camera.
271
The PC Nav is protected in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another
vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer for confi guration of
the system.
Certain functions described in this handbook will become
available during the course of the year.
PC Nav
CONTENTS
01 First steps p. 272
02 General operation p. 273
03 Navigation - Guidance p. 275
04 Traffi c information p. 282
05 Radio p. 284
06 Music media players p. 285
07 Bluetooth telephone p. 288
08 Confi guration p. 290
09 Steering mounted controls p. 291
10 Screen menu map p. 292
Frequently asked questions p. 295
For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver carries
out operations which require prolonged attention while
the vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the PC Nav switches off
following the activation of the Energy Economy mode.
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO EQUIPMENT/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
GPS EUROPE BY SD CARD
272
01
1
1
5
5
10
10
2
2
3
3
4
4
6
6
13
13
11
11
9
9
14
14
15
15
7
7
8
8
12
12
16
16
1.
Engine not running
- Short press: on/off.
- Long press: CD pause, mute for the radio.
Engine running
- Short press: CD pause, mute for the radio.
- Long press: reinitialisation of the system.
2.
Volume adjustment (each source is independent, including
navigation messages and alerts).
3.
Access to the "Radio" Menu. Display the list of stations.
4.
Access to the "Music" Menu. Display the tracks.
6.
Access to the "Phone" Menu. Display the call list.
7.
Access to the "MODE" Menu.
Selection of the successive display of:
Radio, Map, NAV (if navigation is in progress),
Telephone (if a conversation is in progress), Trip Computer.
Long press: display of a black screen (DARK).
8.
Access to the "Navigation" Menu. Display the last destinations.
9.
Access to the "Traffi c" Menu. Display the current traffi c alerts.
10.
ESC: abandon the operation in progress.
11.
CD eject.
12.
Selection of the previous/next radio station from the list.
Selection of the previous/next CD.
Selection of the previous/next MP3 directory.
Selection of the previous/next page of a list.
13.
Selection of the previous/next radio station.
Selection of the previous/next CD or MP3 track.
Selection of the previous/next line of a list.
14.
Buttons 1 to 6:
Selection of the stored radio station.
Selection of the CD in the CD changer.
Long press: store the current radio station.
15.
Reader for navigation SD card only.
16.
Dial for selection of the screen display and according
to the context of the menu.
Short press: contextual menu or confi rmation.
Long press: specifi c contextual menu of the list displayed.
FIRST STEPS
PC Nav CONTROL PANEL
3 - 4
. Long press: access to the audio settings: front/
rear and left/right balance, bass/treble, equalizer,
loudness, automatic volume adjustment, initialise the
settings.
5.
Access to the "SETUP" Menu.
Long press: access to the GPS coverage and the
demonstration mode.
273
02
GENERAL OPERATION
For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the "Screen
menu map" section.
Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following menus:
For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product.
RADIO/MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
TELEPHONE
(If a conversation is in progress)
FULL SCREEN MAP
NAVIGATION
(If guidance is in progress)
SETUP:
system language * , date and time * , display,
vehicle settings * , unit and system settings, "Demo
mode".
TRAFFIC:
TMC information and messages.
* Depending on model.
274
02
1
2
3
3
2
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GENERAL OPERATION
A press on the OK dial gives access to
short-cut menus according to the display
on the screen.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:
NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN PROGRESS):
ABORT GUIDANCE
REPEAT ADVICE
BLOCK ROAD
ROUTE INFO
SHOW DESTINATION
TRIP INFO
Route type
Avoid
Satellites
ZOOM/SCROLL
VOICE ADVICE
ROUTE OPTIONS
RADIO:
IN FM MODE
TRAFFIC INFO (TA)
RDS
RADIOTEXT
REGIONAL PROG.
AM
IN AM MODE
TA
REFRESH AM LIST
FM
FULL SCREEN MAP:
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT
TRAFFIC INFO (TA)
PLAY OPTIONS
NORMAL ORDER
RANDOM TRACK
REPEAT FOLDER
SCAN
SELECT MUSIC
TELEPHONE:
END CALL
HOLD CALL
DIAL
DTMF-TONES
PRIVATE MODE
MICRO OFF
ABORT GUIDANCE /RESUME GUIDANCE
SET DESTINATION
POIS NEARBY
POSITION INFO
MAP SETTINGS
ZOOM/SCROLL
275
1
2
3
5
6
4
03
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SELECTING A DESTINATION
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Destination input" function
and press the dial to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Select the letters of the town one by
one confi rming each time by pressing
the dial.
Once the country has been selected,
turn the dial and select the town
function. Press the dial to confi rm.
NAVIGATION MENU
DESTINATION INPUT
Insert the SD card in the front panel reader and leave it there to use the Navigation functions.
The navigation SD card data must not be modifi ed.
Map data updates are available from PEUGEOT dealers.
A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the
A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the
country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on
tton on the virtual
keypad.
Select the "Address input" function
and press the dial to confi rm.
ADDRESS INPUT
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation
Menu function.
276
7
8
9
10
03
To clear a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last destinations".
A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions from which you can select:
Delete entry
Delete list
Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street"
and "House number" functions.
Turn the dial and select OK.
Press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Save to address book" function to record th
ord the address
entered in a directory fi le. Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
entered in a directory fi le. Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
PC Nav allows up to 4 000 contact fi les to be recorded.
PC Nav allows up to 4 000 contact fi les to be recorded.
To speed up the process, the post code can be entered
tered directly after
selecting the "Postal code" function.
Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.
Then select "Start route guidance"
and the press the dial to confi rm.
During guidance, pressing the end
of the lighting stalk repeats the last
guidance instruction.
You can zoom in/zoom out on the map using the dial.
It is possible to scroll the map or select its orientation via
ion via the short-
cut menu of the FULL SCREEN MAP. Press the dial the
ial then select
"Map settings".
Select the route type:
"Fast route", "Short route" or "Optimized route" and press the dial to
"Fast route", "Short route" or "Optimized route" and press the dial to
confi rm.
It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose fro
se from address
book" or "Choose from last destinations".
CHOOSE FROM LAST DESTINATIONS
CHOOSE FROM LAST DESTINATIONS
CHOOSE FROM ADDRESS BOOK
START ROUTE GUIDANCE
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
277
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
03
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
ROUTE OPTIONS
Select the "Route dynamics" function.
This function gives access to the
"Traffi c independent" or
"Semi-dynamic" options.
Select the "Avoidance criteria"
function. This function provides
access to the AVOID options
(motorways, toll roads, ferries).
Turn the dial and select the
"Recalculate" function to take into
account the route options selected.
Press the dial to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Route type" function and
press the dial to confi rm. This function
allows you to change the route type.
Select the "Route options" function
and press the dial to confi rm.
RECALCULATE
AVOIDANCE CRITERIA
ROUTE DYNAMICS
ROUTE TYPE
ROUTE OPTIONS
NAVIGATION MENU
The route selected by the PC Nav audio/telephone depends directly on the route options.
Changing these options may change the route completely.
278
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
03
Enter a new address, for example.
Once the new address has been
entered, select OK and press the dial
to confi rm.
Select "Recalculate" and press the
dial to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the "Navigation" Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Add stopover" function
(5 stopovers maximum) and press
the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Stopovers" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
OK
ADDRESS INPUT
ADD STOPOVER
STOPOVERS
"NAVIGATION" MENU
RECALCULATE
The stopover must be completed or deleted in order for the guidance
The stopover must be completed or deleted in order for the guidance
to continue to the next destination. Otherwise, the PC N
PC Nav will
always return you to the previous stopover.
Stopovers can be added to the route once the destination has been selected.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
279
8
6
7
4
3
5
2
1
03
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST
(POI)
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "POI nearby" function to
search for POIs around the vehicle.
Select the "POI search" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
NAVIGATION MENU
POI SEARCH
POI NEARBY
Select the "POI in city" function to
search for POIs in the city required.
Select the country then enter the
name of the city using the virtual
keypad.
Select the "POI near route" function to
search for POIs near the route.
Select the "POI in country" function
to search for POIs in the country
required.
Select the "POI near destination"
function to search for POIs near the
point of arrival of the route.
POI NEAR DESTINATION
POI NEAR ROUTE
POI IN COUNTRY
POI IN CITY
A list of cities present in the country selected can be acc
be accessed via
the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various
businesses, airports...).
280
03
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)
LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)
* According to availability in the country.
This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.
281
5
6
3
2
1
4
03
NAVIGATION SETTINGS
Select "Set parameters for risk areas"
to gain access to the "Display on
map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert"
functions.
Select the "POI categories on Map"
function to select the POIs to be
displayed on the map by default.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Settings" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
POI CATEGORIES ON MAP
SETTINGS
SET PARAMETERS FOR RISK AREAS
NAVIGATION MENU
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Select the "Navi volume" function and
turn the dial to set the volume of each
voice synthesiser (traffi c information,
alert messages…).
NAVI VOLUME
The volume of the Risk Areas POIs alert can only be adjusted
during this type of alert.
UPDATING THE RISK AREAS POIs
This requires an SDHC (High Capacity) compatible reader.
Download the update fi le from the Internet (www.peugeot.fr or
www.peugeot.co.uk).
Open this fi le and copy the extracted documents to the DATABASE
folder on the SD card, replacing the existing fi les.
282
2
1
3
4
5
04
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND
DISPLAY OF TMC MESSAGES
Then select the radius of the fi lter in
miles (km) required in accordance
with the route, press the dial to
confi rm. When all of the messages on
the route are selected, the addition of
a geographical fi lter is recommended
(within a radius of 3 miles (5 km) for
example) to reduce the number of
messages displayed on the map.
The geographical fi lter follows the
movement of the vehicle.
The fi lters are independent and their results are cumulative.
The fi lters are independent and their results are cumulative.
We recommend a fi lter on the route and a fi lter around the vehicle of:
We recommend a fi lter on the route and a fi lter around the vehicle of:
- 2 miles (3 km) or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy traffi c,
- 2 miles (3 km) or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy traffi c,
- 6 miles (10 km) for a region with normal traffi c,
- 30 miles (50 km) for long journeys (motorway).
Press the TRAFFIC button again or
select the Traffi c Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Press the TRAFFIC button.
TMC (Traffi c Message Channel) messages contain information on traffi c and weather conditions,
received in real time and transmitted to the driver in the form of audible announcements and
symbols on the navigation map.
The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a traffi c problem.
Select the "Geo. Filter" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
MESSAGES ON ROUTE
The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffi c Menu sorted in
The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffi c Menu sorted in
order of proximity.
ONLY WARNINGS ON ROUTE
TRAFFIC MENU
Select the fi lter of your choice:
ALL WARNING MESSAGES
ALL MESSAGES
The messages appear on the map
and on the list.
To exit, press ESC.
GEO. FILTER
283
04
2
1
3
2
1
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS
Red and yellow triangle: traffi c information, par example:
Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
With the current audio source
displayed on the screen, press the
dial.
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:
Select Traffi c Announcements (TA)
and press the dial to confi rm and go
to the associated settings.
TA
The TA (Traffi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio
station transmitting this type of message. When a traffi c report is
transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, Jukebox, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
284
3
2
1
1
05
SELECTING A STATION
When the current radio station is
displayed on the screen, press the
dial.
The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides
ovides access to
the following short-cuts:
Select the function required and press
the dial to confi rm to gain access to
the corresponding settings.
TA
RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same
RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in
certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured
certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of
throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of
the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during
the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during
a journey.
The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with
the reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the
way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the
audio equipment.
RDS - REGIONAL MODE
Press the RADIO button to display
the list of stations received locally
sorted in alphabetical order.
Select the station required by turning
the dial and press to confi rm.
REGIONAL PROG.
RADIOTEXT
RDS
While listening to the radio, press one of the
buttons to select the previous or next station on
the list.
Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for mo
or more than
2 seconds to store the current station.
Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the sto
the stored radio
station.
AM
RADIO
A long press of one of the buttons starts the
automatic search for a station with a lower or
higher frequency.
285
06
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3/WMA CD
INFORMATION AND ADVICE
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be pla
be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
The PC Nav will only play audio fi les with the extension ".mp3" with
The PC Nav will only play audio fi les with the extension ".mp3" with
a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension ".wma"
a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension ".wma"
with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.
It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of fi le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Au
2.5 Audio Layer 3
and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Medi
Media Audio and
the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standa
standards which
permit the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
permit the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any play or display
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any play or display
problems.
286
06
6
4
5
3
2
1
SELECTING/PLAYING MUSIC
CD, MP3/WMA CD
The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend
The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depend
on the recording programme and/or the settings used. We
on the recording programme and/or the settings used. We
recommend the ISO 9660 fi le standard.
Press the MUSIC button.
Select the "Select music" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Press the up or down button to select
the next/previous folder.
Select the music source required:
CD, MP3/WMA CD. Press the dial to
confi rm. Play begins.
SELECT MUSIC
Press the MUSIC button again or
select the "Music" Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Press one of the buttons to select a
music track.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or rewind play.
"MUSIC" MENU
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA fi les appears under "Music" Menu.
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA fi les appears under "Music" Menu.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
287
3
1
2
06
1
4
2
3
5
4
Connect the portable device (MP3/
WMA player…) to the JACK socket
using a suitable cable.
Press the MUSIC button then press
it again or select the Music Menu
function and press the dial to confi rm.
Select the AUX music source and
press the dial to confi rm. Play begins
automatically.
Select the External device function
and press the dial to activate it.
EXTERNAL DEVICE
Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.
Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.
USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX)
AUDIO/JACK CABLE NOT SUPPLIED
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
MUSIC MENU
MUSIC MENU
SELECT MUSIC
CD CHANGER
Insert one or more CDs in the
changer. Press the MUSIC button.
Press one of the buttons on the
numeric keypad to select the
corresponding CD.
Select the "CD Changer" music
source and press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Select music" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
CD CHANGER
PLAYING A CD (NOT MP3/WMA COMPATIBLE)
Press the MUSIC button again or
select the Music Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
288
1
2
3
2
1
4
07
* The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth
telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the
services available to you. A list of mobile telephones with the best level of compatibility is available
from the dealer network.
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
CONNECTING A TELEPHONE
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the PC Na
PC Nav must be
carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on.
carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.
The last telephone connected is reconnected
automatically.
Enter the authentication code on the
telephone. The code to be entered is
displayed on the screen.
To change the telephone connected,
press the PHONE button, then select
Phone Menu and press the dial to
confi rm.
Once the telephone has been connected, PC Nav can s
can synchronise
the address book and the call list. This synchronisation
ation may take a
few minutes * .
Select "Connect phone". Select the
telephone and press to confi rm.
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears
on the multifunction screen. Select the telephone requir
required for a new
connection.
Press the PHONE button.
For a fi rst connection, select
"Search phone" and press the dial to
confi rm. Then select the name of the
telephone.
SEARCH PHONE
CONNECT PHONE
289
07
2
1
1
3
2
Press the end of the steering wheel control to accept the call or end
the call in progress.
Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No"
to refuse and confi rm by pressing the
dial.
RECEIVING A CALL
MAKING A CALL
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
on the multifunction screen.
YES
END CALL
To hang up, press the PHONE button
or press the dial and select "End call"
then confi rm by pressing the dial.
Press the PHONE button.
Select "Dial number", then dial the
telephone number using the virtual
keypad.
Select the "Phone" Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the veh
he vehicle appears
under "Phone" Menu. You can select a number and pres
d press the dial to
make the call.
NO
It is also possible to select a number from the address b
ress book. You can
select "Dial from address book". The PC Nav permits the recording
select "Dial from address book". The PC Nav permits the recording
of up to 4 000 entries.
Press the end of the steering wheel control for more than
Press the end of the steering wheel control for more than
two seconds to gain access to the address book.
DIAL NUMBER
"PHONE" MENU
To delete a number, press the PHONE button then pres
n press and hold on
a call number to display a list of actions including:
Delete entry
Delete list
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
290
4
3
2
1
6
5
08
CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
The SETUP function gives access to the following options: System language, Date & Time, Display
(Brightness, Colour, Map colour), Vehicle, Units, System.
Set the parameters one by one using
the direction arrows and confi rm by
means of the dial.
Select the "Date format" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Set date & time" function
and press the dial to confi rm.
Confi rm the format required using the dial.
Pressing the SET UP button for more than 2 seconds gives
Pressing the SET UP button for more than 2 seconds gives
access to:
These settings must be re-entered if the battery has been
These settings must be re-entered if the battery has been
disconnected.
Press the SET UP button.
Confi rm the format required using
the dial.
Select the "Time format" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
SET DATE & TIME
Select the "Date & Time" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
DEMO MODE
GPS COVERAGE
DESCRIPTION OF THE UNIT
DATE & TIME
291
09
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
RADIO: selection of the previous stored station.
CD CHANGER: selection of the previous CD.
Selection of the previous entry in the address book.
RADIO: selection of the next stored station.
CD CHANGER: selection of the next CD.
Selection of the next entry in the address book.
RADIO: change to the next radio station on the list.
Long press: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD/CD CHANGER: selection of the next track.
CD/CD CHANGER: continuous press: fast forward play.
RADIO: change to the previous radio station on the list.
Long press: automatic search for a lower frequency.
CD/CD CHANGER: selection of the previous track.
CD/CD CHANGER: continuous press: fast backward play.
- Change the sound source.
- Make a call from the address book.
- Pick up/Hang up the telephone.
- Press for more than 2 seconds:
access to the address book.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Mute: by pressing
the volume increase
and decrease buttons
simultaneously.
Restore the sound: by
pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
292
10
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
2
3
4
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
1
2
3
3
2
3
3
"RADIO" MENU
MAIN FUNCTION
CHOICE A
choice A1
choice A2
CHOICE B...
SCREEN MENU MAP
"MUSIC" MENU
"TRAFFIC" MENU
MESSAGES ON ROUTE
ONLY WARNINGS ON ROUTE
ALL WARNING MESSAGES
ALL MESSAGES
GEO. FILTER
Within 2 miles (3 km)
Within 3 miles (5 km)
Within 6 miles (10 km)
Within 30 miles (50 km)
Within 60 miles (100 km)
SELECT MUSIC
SOUND SETTINGS
Balance/Fader
Bass/Treble
Equalizer
Linear
Classic
Jazz
Rock/Pop
Techno
Vocal
Loudness
Speed dependent volume
Reset sound settings
WAVEBAND
FM
AM
MANUAL TUNE
SOUND SETTINGS
Balance/Fader
Bass/Treble
Equalizer
Linear
Classic
Jazz
Rock/Pop
Techno
Vocal
Loudness
Speed dependent volume
Reset sound settings
293
1
2
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
2
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
ROUTE OPTIONS
Route type
Fast route
Short route
Optimized route
Route dynamics
Traffi c independent
Semi-dynamic
Avoidance criteria
Avoid motorways
Avoid toll roads
Avoid ferries
Recalculate
STOPOVERS
Add stopover
Address input
Navigate HOME
Choose from address book
Choose from last destinations
Rearrange route
Replace stopover
Delete stopover
Recalculate
Fast route
Short route
Optimized route
"NAVIGATION" MENU
ABORT GUIDANCE/RESUME GUIDANCE
POI SEARCH
POI nearby
POI near destination
POI in city
POI in country
POI near route
SETTINGS
Navi volume
POI categories on Map
Set parameters for risk areas
Display on MAP
Visual alert
Sound alert
DESTINATION INPUT
Address input
Country
City
Street
House number
Start route guidance
Postal code
Save to address book
Intersection
City district
Geo position
MAP
Navigate HOME
Choose from address book
Choose from last destinations
TMC station information
294
1
2
3
4
1
3
4
3
4
2
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
2
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
2
3
4
4
4
4
2
4
3
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
4
4
2
3
4
4
3
4
4
4
2
3
3
3
"PHONE" MENU
"SETUP" MENU
DIAL NUMBER
SETTINGS
Select ring tone
Phone/Ring tone volume
Enter mailbox number
SYSTEM LANGUAGE *
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
Italiano
Nederlands
Polski
Portuguese
DATE & TIME
*
Set date & time
Date format
Time format
Dark blue
MAP
colour
Day mode for
MAP
Night mode for
MAP
Auto. Day/Night for
MAP
VEHICLE
*
Vehicle information
Alert log
Status of functions
DISPLAY
Brightness
Colour
Pop titanium
Toffee
Blue steel
Technogrey
UNITS
Temperature
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Metric/Imperial
Kilometres (Consumption: l/100)
Kilometres (Consumption: km/l)
Miles (Consumption: MPG)
SYSTEM
Factory reset
Software version
Automatic scrolling
* Available according to model.
DIAL FROM ADDRESS BOOK
CALL LISTS
CONNECT PHONE
Search phone
Phones connected
Disconnect phone
Rename phone
Delete pairing
Delete all pairings
Show details
295
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the Linear musical ambience
and set the loudness correction to the "Active"
position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position
in radio mode.
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the Audio section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Because of their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio
data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
The CD player sound
is poor.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
296
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the
stored stations do
not function (no
sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or
there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle
is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Sound cut-outs of
1 to 2 seconds in radio
mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon
is too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off,
the audio equipment
switches off after a few
minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time
depends on the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...)
An incorrect waveband is selected.
Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
stations are stored.
297
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The TA box is ticked.
However, certain traffi c
jams along the route
are not indicated in real
time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the
traffi c information.
Wait until the traffi c information is being received
correctly (displaying of the traffi c information
symbols on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the
traffi c information.
The time taken to
calculate a route
sometimes seems
longer than usual.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the traffi c information available.
The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD is
being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being
calculated.
Wait until the CD has been copied or stop the
copying before starting the guidance function.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 3 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely.
Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
3 satellites (long press on the SETUP button,
then select GPS coverage).
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the
conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the conditions of reception of the
GPS signal.
The route is not
calculated successfully.
The exclusion criteria may confl ict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a motorway with tolls).
Check the exclusion criteria.
I receive a speed
camera alert for a
camera which is not on
my route.
The audible speed
camera alert is not
working.
The system announces all speed cameras located in a conical zone
forward of the vehicle. it may detect speed cameras on nearby or parallel
roads.
Audible alerts are not active.
The alert volume level is set to minimum.
Zoom the map to view the exact position of the
speed camera.
Activate audible alerts in Navigation Menu,
Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
Increase the speed camera alert volume.
298
There is a long waiting
time after inserting a CD.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of
data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.
This phenomenon is normal.
I cannot connect my
Bluetooth telephone.
A telephone connected
by Bluetooth is
inaudible.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be deactivated or the equipment
may not be visible.
The volume level depends on both the system and the telephone.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function
is activated.
- Check that your telephone is visible.
Increase the PC Nav volume setting, possibly to
maximum, and increase the telephone volume
level if necessary.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
299
PC Sound
CONTENTS
• 01 First steps p . 300
• 02 Main menu p . 301
• 03 Audio p . 302
• 04 USB reader p . 305
• 05 Bluetooth functions p . 308
• 06 Steering mounted controls p . 310
• 07 Confi guration p . 311
• 08 Screen menu map p . 312
• Frequently asked questions p . 314
Your PC Sound is coded in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another
vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer for confi guration of
the system.
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is
stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the audio system may switch
off after a few minutes.
AUDIO EQUIPMENT/BLUETOOTH SYSTEM
300
1
1
2
2
10
10
11
11
13
13
14
14
15
15
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
12
12
01
FIRST STEPS
1.
On/Off and volume adjustment.
2.
CD eject.
3.
Selection of the display on the screen from the modes:
Audio (AUDIO), Vehicle Diagnostics and Telephone (TEL)
functions.
4.
Selection of the source:
radio, audio CD/MP3 CD, CD changer, USB, Jack
connection, Streaming.
5.
Selection of the FM1, FM2, FMast and AM wavebands.
6.
Setting audio options: front/rear balance, left/right balance,
loudness, sound ambiences.
7.
Display the list of local stations, of the tracks on the CD or of
the MP3 directories.
8.
Abandon current operation.
9.
TA (Traffi c Announcement) function on/off.
Long press: access to the PTY (Types of radio programme)
mode.
10.
Confi rmation.
11.
Automatic search for a lower/higher frequency.
Selection of previous/next CD, MP3 or USB track.
12.
Selection of a lower/higher radio frequency.
Selection of the previous/next CD.
Selection of the previous/next MP3 directory.
Selection of the previous/next USB equipment directory/genre/
artist/playlist.
13.
Display the general menu.
14.
Buttons 1 to 6:
Selection of a stored radio station..
Selection of a CD in the CD changer.
Long press: storing of a station.
15.
The DARK button changes the display on the screen to
improve driving comfort at night.
1st press: lighting of the top banner only.
2nd press: displaying of a black screen.
3rd press: return to the standard display.
301
02
MAIN MENU
AUDIO FUNCTIONS
: radio,
CD, USB, options.
VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS
: alerts.
TELEPHONE
: hands-free kit,
pairing, management of a call.
PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION
:
vehicle parameters, display, languages.
> MONOCHROME SCREEN C
> MONOCHROME SCREEN A
For a detailed global view of the
menus available, refer to the
"Screen menu map" section of
this chapter.
302
2
3
3
4
4
1
2
2
4
4
3
3
1
1
03
AUDIO
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select the
radio.
Press the BAND AST button to select
a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.
Briefl y press one of the buttons to
carry out an automatic search of the
radio stations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out a
manual search of the radio stations.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received
locally (30 stations maximum).
To update this list, press for more than
two seconds.
Select ACTIVATE FREQUENCY
FOLLOWING (RDS) then press OK.
RDS appears on the display.
Select the FM WAVEBAND
PREFERENCES function then
press OK.
Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then
press OK.
Press the MENU button.
The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks) may block reception, including
in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not
indicate any failure of the audio equipment.
RDS
The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in
certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the
territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a
journey.
RADIO
SELECTING A STATION
303
03
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
AUDIO
Insert circular compact discs only.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a
personal recorder, may cause faults which are no refl ection on the
quality of the original player.
Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play
begins automatically.
To play a disc which has already been
inserted, press the SOURCE button
several times in succession and select
CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward.
Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.
The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which may
take anything between a few seconds and several tens of seconds,
before play begins.
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 fi les spread
over 8 directory levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of
two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played.
While the CD is being played, the directory fl ow chart is not followed.
All of the fi les are displayed on a single level.
To play a disc which has already been
inserted, press the SOURCE button
several times in succession and
select CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
CD
PLAYING A CD
MP3 CD
PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on the CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of
the MP3 compilation.
304
03
1
1
2
2
3
3
2.5 Audio Layer 3,
is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording
it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet.
it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be p
t be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
The audio equipment will only play fi les with the extension ".mp3"
The audio equipment will only play fi les with the extension ".mp3"
with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of fi le
with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of fi le
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without using
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without using
special characters (e.g. " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
special characters (e.g. " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
MP3 CD
INFORMATION AND ADVICE
AUDIO
Insert the CDs in a multi-slot changer
one by one.
On a single slot changer, press
LOAD, select the number of the CD,
then insert the CD, or press and hold
LOAD and insert the CDs one by one.
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select
CD CHANGER.
Press one of the buttons on the
numeric keypad to select the
corresponding CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forwards or rewind play.
PLAYING A CD
* according to availability on the vehicle.
AUDIO/MP3 CD CHANGER *
305
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
04
USB PLAYER - PLUG
The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created over
a period which depends on the capacity of the USB equipment.
The other sources are available during this time.
The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or
each time a USB memory stick is connected.
When connecting for the fi rst time, the classifi cation suggested is by
folder. When you reconnect, the classifi cation selected previously is
retained.
Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or
using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched
on, the USB source is detected as soon as it
is connected. Play begins automatically after a
delay which depends on the capacity of the USB
stick.
The fi le formats recognised are .mp3 (mpeg1
layer 3 only), .wma (standard 9 only, 128 kbits/
sec compression), .wav and .ogg.
The playlists types accepted are m3u, .pls, .wpl.
This unit consists of a USB port and a Jack
socket * . The audio fi les are transmitted from
portable equipment such as a digital player or
a USB memory stick to your PC Sound to be
listened to via the vehicle's speakers.
USB key (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or Ipod
®
of
®
generation 5 or later:
- USB memory sticks should be formatted FAT
or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported),
- the Ipod
®
lead is essential,
®
- navigation through the fi le database is by
means of the steering wheel controls,
- the IPod software should be regularly updated
for the best connection.
Other Ipod
®
players of earlier generations and
®
players using the MTP protocol * :
- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied),
- navigation through the fi le database is from the
portable equipment.
The list of compatible equipment and the compression rates supported are available from
PEUGEOT dealers.
USING THE USB PLAYER - PLUG
CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK
* According to vehicle.
306
3
3
4
4
1
1
5
5
2
2
04
USING THE USB PLAYER - PLUG
Press LIST briefl y to display the
previously selected classifi cation.
Navigate through the list using the
left/right and up/down buttons.
Confi rm the selection by pressing OK.
The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as defi ned on the
iPod
®
).
®
Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 5 above.
Do not connect a hard disk or USB devices other than audio
equipment to the USB port. This could damage your installation.
CONNECTING AN IPOD
®
CONNECTING AN IPOD
CONNECTING AN IPOD
VIA THE USB PORT
®
Press one of these buttons to gain
access to the previous/next track on
the classifi cation list currently being
played.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
Press one of these buttons to gain
access to the previous/next Genre,
Folder, Artist or Playlist on the
classifi cation list currently being
played.
Press and hold LIST to display the
different classifi cations.
Select by Folder/Artist/Genre/Playlist,
press OK to select the classifi cation
required, then press OK again to confi rm.
- by Folder: all folders containing audio
fi les recognised on the peripheral
device, classifi ed in alphabetical order
without following the fl ow chart.
- by Artist: all of the artist names
defi ned in the ID3 Tags, classifi ed in
alphabetical order.
- by Genre: all of the genres defi ned in
the ID3 Tags.
- by Playlist: in accordance with the
playlists recorded on the USB device.
OK
307
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
The controls are displayed and managed via the
portable equipment.
First adjust the volume of your portable equipment.
Then adjust the volume of your audio
equipment.
The auxiliary socket, JACK or RCA, permits the connection of
portable equipment (MP3 player...).
Connect the portable equipment (MP3
player…) to the JACK socket or to the
audio sockets (white and red, RCA type)
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select AUX.
USING THE AUXILIARY SOCKET (AUX)
JACK SOCKET OR RCA SOCKET (according to vehicle)
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
OF THE AUXILIARY SOURCE
Do not connect a single piece of equipment via the USB port and the
JACK socket at the same time.
USB Player - Plug
308
1
1
6
6
2
2
7
7
4
4
9
9
5
5
10
10
3
3
8
8
05
BLUETOOTH
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth
mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio
equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
Press the MENU button.
A window is displayed with "Searching...".
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.
In the menu, select:
- Bluetooth telephone function - Audio
- Bluetooth confi guration
- Perform a Bluetooth search
The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth
equipment used. Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to fi nd out which services are
available to you. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is available from the
network. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer.
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
SCREEN C
The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions in
particular: Directory * , Call list, Pairing management.
The fi rst 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.
A virtual keypad is displayed on the screen:
enter a code with at least 4 digits.
Confi rm by pressing OK.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.
Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one
telephone can be connected at a time.
A message is displayed on the screen of the
telephone chosen: to accept the pairing, enter
the same code on the telephone, then confi rm by
pressing OK.
"Pairing of Name_telephone successful" appears on the screen.
The automatic connection authorised is only active after the telephone has
been confi gured.
The directory and the call list can be accessed after the synchronisation period.
PAIRING A TELEPHONE
* If your telephone is fully compatible.
The pairing can also be initiated from the telephone.
309
05
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
2
2
1
1
RECEIVING A CALL
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
on the multifunction screen.
Initiate the pairing between the telephone and
the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from
the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the
telephone's keypad. See steps 1 to 10 on the
previous pages. During the pairing phase, the vehicle
must be stationary with the key in the ignition.
Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function
menu.
The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone
automatically.
Select the YES tab on the display
using the buttons and confi rm by
pressing OK.
Press the steering mounted control OK to accept
the call.
From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage
the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory.
Press the end of the steering mounted control for
more than two seconds to gain access to your
directory.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad, with
the vehicle stationary.
MAKING A CALL
BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMING
(AVAILABLE DURING THE YEAR)
Wireless transmission of the telephone's music fi les via the audio
equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the appropriate
bluetooth profi les (Profi les A2DP/AVRCP).
* In certain cases, playing of the Audio fi les must be initiated from the
keypad.
** If the telephone supports the function.
Activate the streaming source by
pressing the SOURCE button * . The
tracks to be played can be controlled
as usual via the buttons on the Radio
control panel and the steering wheel
controls ** . The contextual information
can be displayed on the screen.
BLUETOOTH
310
06
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
RADIO: selection of the next stored station.
CD CHANGER: selection of the next CD.
USB: selection of the next genre/artist/
directory from the classifi cation list.
Selection of the next item on a menu.
RADIO: selection of the previous stored
station.
CD CHANGER: selection of the previous CD.
USB: selection of the previous genre/artist/
directory from the classifi cation list.
Selection of the previous item on a menu.
RADIO: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD/CD CHANGER/MP3/USB: selection of the
next track.
CD/CD CHANGER/USB: continuous press: fast
forwards play.
Selection of the previous item.
RADIO: automatic search for a lower frequency.
CD/CD CHANGER/MP3/USB: selection of the
previous track.
CD/CD CHANGER/USB: continuous press:
rewind play.
Selection of the next item.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Mute: by pressing
the volume increase
and decrease buttons
simultaneously.
The sound is restored by
pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
- Change of sound source.
- Confi rmation of a selection.
- Pick up/Hang up the
telephone.
- Press for more than 2 seconds:
access to the telephone menu.
311
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
07
CONFIGURATION
Press the MENU button.
Using the arrows, select
PERSONALISATION
CONFIGURATION.
Press to confi rm the selection.
Using the arrows, select DISPLAY
CONFIGURATION.
Press to confi rm the selection.
Press to confi rm the selection.
Using the arrows, select ADJUST
DATE AND TIME.
Adjust the settings one by one
confi rming by pressing the OK button.
Next select the OK tab on the screen
then confi rm.
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
SCREEN C
312
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
3
2
3
08
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RADIO-CD
DISPLAY ADJUST
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTES
12 H/24 H MODE
SCREEN MENU MAP
MAIN FUNCTION
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.
CHOICE A
Choice A1
Choice A2
CHOICE B...
LANGUAGE
FRANCAIS
ITALIANO
NEDERLANDS
PORTUGUES
PORTUGUES-BRASIL
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
ESPANOL
Press the OK dial for access to short-cut
menus according to the display on the
screen:
monochrome A
monochrome C
RADIO
activate/deactivate RDS
activate/deactivate REG mode
activate/deactivate radiotext
RANDOM PLAY
RDS SEARCH
REG MODE
CD REPEAT
VEHICLE CONFIG *
REV WIPE ACT
GUIDE LAMPS
OPTIONS
DIAGNOSTICS
consult
abandon
UNITS
TEMPERATURE: °CELSIUS/°FAHRENHEIT
FUEL CONSUMPTION: KM/L - L/100 - MPG
CD/MP3 CD/CD CHANGER
activate/deactivate Intro
activate/deactivate track repeat (the entire current CD
for CD or CD Changer, the entire current folder for MP3
CD or MP3 Changer)
activate/deactivate random play (the entire current CD
for CD or CD Changer, the entire current folder for MP3
CD, all of the folders of the current CD for MP3 Changer)
USB
activate/deactivate track repeat (of the current folder/
artist/genre/playlist)
activate/deactivate random play (of the current folder/
artist/genre/playlist)
312
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
3
2
3
08
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RADIO-CD
DISPLAY ADJUST
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTES
12 H/24 H MODE
SCREEN MENU MAP
MAIN FUNCTION
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.
CHOICE A
Choice A1
Choice A2
CHOICE B...
LANGUAGE
FRANCAIS
ITALIANO
NEDERLANDS
PORTUGUES
PORTUGUES-BRASIL
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
ESPANOL
Press the OK dial for access to short-cut
menus according to the display on the
screen:
monochrome A
monochrome C
RADIO
activate/deactivate RDS
activate/deactivate REG mode
activate/deactivate radiotext
RANDOM PLAY
RDS SEARCH
REG MODE
CD REPEAT
VEHICLE CONFIG *
REV WIPE ACT
GUIDE LAMPS
OPTIONS
DIAGNOSTICS
consult
abandon
UNITS
TEMPERATURE: °CELSIUS/°FAHRENHEIT
FUEL CONSUMPTION: KM/L - L/100 - MPG
CD/MP3 CD/CD CHANGER
activate/deactivate Intro
activate/deactivate track repeat (the entire current CD
for CD or CD Changer, the entire current folder for MP3
CD or MP3 Changer)
activate/deactivate random play (the entire current CD
for CD or CD Changer, the entire current folder for MP3
CD, all of the folders of the current CD for MP3 Changer)
USB
activate/deactivate track repeat (of the current folder/
artist/genre/playlist)
activate/deactivate random play (of the current folder/
artist/genre/playlist)
313
1
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
2
3
4
3
4
2
3
4
2
4
4
3
3
4
4
1
2
2
08
3
4
4
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
2
3
4
2
3
3
AUDIO FUNCTIONS
FM BAND PREFERENCES
alternative frequencies (RDS)
activate/deactivate
regional mode (REG)
activate/deactivate
radio-text information (RDTXT)
activate/deactivate
PLAY MODES
album repeat (RPT)
activate/deactivate
track random play (RDM)
activate/deactivate
ALERT LOG
PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION
DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS *
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
video brightness adjustment
normal video
inverse video
brightness (- +) adjustment
date and time adjustment
day/month/year adjustment
hour/minute adjustment
choice of 12h/24h mode
choice of units
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
°Celsius/°Fahrenheit
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.
CHOICE OF LANGUAGE
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
MANAGE THE TELEPHONE CALL
Terminate the current call
Activate private mode
BLUETOOTH CONFIGURATION
Connect/Disconnect a device
Telephone function
Audio Streaming function
Consult the paired device
Delete a paired device
Perform a Bluetooth search
CALL
Calls list
Directory
SCREEN MENU MAP
VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS
Pressing the MENU button displays:
monochrome C
314
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None"
and set the loudness correction to the "Active"
position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position
in radio mode.
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source
(radio, CD...).
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable CDs
will not be played by the audio system.
will not be played by the audio system.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio
data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
The message "USB
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
The Bluetooth connection is cut.
The battery of the peripheral may not be suffi ciently charged.
The USB memory stick is not recognised.
The memory stick may be corrupt.
Reformat the memory stick.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The CD player sound
is poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
315
The traffi c announcement
(TA) is displayed. I do
not receive any traffi c
information.
Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffi c
information.
The radio station is not part of the regional traffi c information network.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the
stored stations do
not function (no
sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or
there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle
is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Sound cut-outs of
1 to 2 seconds in radio
mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon
is too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off,
the audio equipment
switches off after a few
minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time
depends on the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected.
Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
stations are stored.
The message "the audio
system is overheated"
appears on the display.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
allow the system to cool.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too
high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection
mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing
of the CD.
Handbook Supplement
TRAJECTORY CONTROL
SYSTEMS
Anti-skid regulation (ASR) and
electronic stability programme
(ESP)
Reactivation
131
If this warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel and the indi-
cator lamp on the button comes
on, this indicates that the ASR and
ESP systems are deactivated.
This also deactivates the emergency
braking assistance and the automatic
lighting of the hazard warning lamps.
Deactivation
Press the "ESP OFF" button, located
in the centre of the dashboard.
This document describes the special
features of your 308 GTi.
Refer to the handbook for all other
descriptions and specifi cations, and
also to the servicing booklet for petrol
engine servicing.
WELCOME
These systems are reactivated automa-
tically each time the ignition is switched
off.
You can also press the "ESP OFF"
button again to reactivate them
manually.
12
!
TECHNICAL DATA
ENGINE AND GEARBOX
MODEL:
Model code: 4C...
5FU-8
PETROL ENGINE
1.6 litre THP 16V
200 bhp
Cubic capacity (cm
3
) 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8
Max power: EU standard (kW) 147
Max power engine speed (rpm) 5 500
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 275
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 700
Fuel Unleaded
Catalytic converter Yes
GEARBOX
Manual
(6-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with fi lter replacement) 4.25
Gearbox - Final drive 1.9
WEIGHTS (in kg)
Petrol engine
1.6 litre THP 16V
200 bhp
Gearbox Manual
Model code: 4C... 5FU-8
- Unladen weight 1 399
- Kerb weight 1 474
- Payload 451
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 850
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
1 850
TOWING A TRAILER...
AN. 10308.A040
197
Your vehicle cannot be fi tted with a towing device.
The make-up of the sporty exhaust system does not
allow it.
